Mercedes GLK Suv 2008 x204 Owners Manual 01

Disclaimer
All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Dateiname: 6515_0671_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 1

wobuchh, Version: 2.11.4
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz.

Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with
your vehicle and read this manual. This will
help you to obtain the maximum pleasure
from your vehicle and to avoid endangering
yourself and others.
Items of optional equipment are marked with
an asterisk *.
The equipment or product names in your vehi-
cle may vary, depending on the model, the
ordered items, the country specifications and
availability.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art and, therefore,
reserves the right to introduce changes in
design, equipment and technical features at
any time. You cannot, therefore, base any
claims on the data, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre if you have any questions.
The Owner's Manual, Brief Instructions,
Service Booklet and supplements related to
vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle.
You should always keep them in the vehicle
and pass them on to the new owner if you sell
the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in German and in Eng-
lish in the interactive Owner's Manual on
the Internet at:
www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanlei-
tung
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 2

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 3

Contents 3
Index........................................................ 4 At a glance............................................ 21
Introduction.......................................... 17 Safety.................................................... 33
Controls................................................ 57
Operation............................................ 143
Practical advice................................. 173
Technical data.................................... 241

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 4

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Setting the air distribution.............. 124

Setting the airflow.......................... 124
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Setting the air vents....................... 122
drive)................................................... 105 Setting the temperature................. 122
Switching the residual heat func-
A tion on/off...................................... 126
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Air-conditioning system
Display message (luxury multi- see Air conditioning
function steering wheel)......... 183, 185 Air filter
Display message (multi-function Display message............................. 195
steering wheel)............................... 178 Air pressure
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).......... 51 see Tyre pressure
Warning lamp.................................. 201 Antifreeze concentration................... 248
Acceleration........................................ 249 Anti-lock braking system
Accident see ABS
Notes.............................................. 205 Anti-theft alarm system
Acoustic warning signal see ATA
see Warning tone Anti-theft systems................................ 54
Active Service System PLUS Ashtray................................................ 138
see Service interval display ASSYST PLUS
Adaptive brake lamps.......................... 52 see Service interval display
Airbags ASSYST PLUS service indicator........ 167
Activation.......................................... 35 Calling up the date (on-board
Control unit....................................... 35 computer)....................................... 167
Driver's............................................. 38 ATA (anti-theft alarm system)............. 54
Driver's knee airbag.......................... 39 Switching off the alarm..................... 55
Front................................................. 38 Audio
Front passenger................................ 38 On-board computer (luxury multi-
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning function steering wheel)................... 98
lamp .............................................. 200 Audio DVD
Sidebag............................................. 39 Operating (on-board computer,
System.............................................. 37 luxury multi-function steering
Windowbag....................................... 39 wheel)............................................... 99
Air conditioning AUTO lights
2-zone Thermatic............................ 118 Display message............................. 189
3-zone Thermotronic....................... 120 Automatic car wash........................... 168
Activating/deactivating.................. 121 Automatic transmission
Activating/deactivating air-recir- Changing gear yourself..................... 86
culation mode................................. 125 Driving tips....................................... 87
Controlling automatically................ 122 Emergency running mode............... 209
Convenience opening/closing Indicator in the multi-function dis-
(air-recirculation mode).................. 126 play .................................................. 85
Cooling with air dehumidification. . . 121 Malfunction..................................... 209
Demisting the windscreen.............. 124 One-touch gearshifting..................... 86
Malfunction indicator lamp............. 199 Program selector button................... 87
Misted-up windows......................... 125 Releasing the parking lock man-
Rear window heating...................... 125 ually................................................ 215
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 5

Index 5
Selector lever positions.................... 85 Brake lamps

Shift ranges...................................... 86 Adaptive............................................ 52
Trailer towing.................................... 88 Display message..................... 188, 191
Axle load, permissible Brakes
Rear (trailer towing)........................ 254 Parking brake.................................... 84
Warning lamp.................................. 202
B Brake system
Display message............................. 185
Bag hook............................................. 136
Bulb
Ball coupling
see Lamp
Fitting............................................. 162
Bulbs
Removing........................................ 165
Brake lamp..................................... 220
BAS (Brake Assist)............................... 52
Display messages (multi-function
Battery
steering wheel)............................... 194
Changing (key)................................ 216
Licence plate lamp.......................... 220
Charging......................................... 234
Overview......................................... 218
Checking (key)................................ 216
Rear foglamp.................................. 220
Check lamp (key)............................ 216
Replacing........................................ 219
Disconnecting................................. 233
Reversing lamp............................... 220
Display message............................. 184
Tail lamp......................................... 220
Jump-starting.................................. 234
Turn signal lamp..................... 219, 220
Maintenance (vehicle)..................... 232
Reconnecting.................................. 234
C
Removing/fitting............................ 233
Vehicle battery............................... 232 Care..................................................... 167
Belt force limiters Automatic car wash........................ 168
Activation.......................................... 35 Dashboard...................................... 170
Belt height adjustment........................ 72 Headlamps..................................... 169
Belt tensioners High-pressure cleaners................... 168
Activation.......................................... 35 Panorama sliding sunroof............... 170
Belt warning.......................................... 72 Parktronic....................................... 171
Bonnet Plastic trim..................................... 170
Bonnet catch.................................. 147 Rear window................................... 169
Display message............................. 183 Reversing camera........................... 172
Opening/closing ............................ 146 Seat covers..................................... 170
Bonnet release lever Side windows ................................. 169
Release lever.................................. 147 Steering wheel boss....................... 170
Boot Tail pipes........................................ 171
Automatic opening..................... 60, 61 Trailer tow hitch.............................. 172
Boot lid Trim strips...................................... 171
Opening/closing............................... 59 Windscreen..................................... 169
Brake Assist Wiper blades................................... 169
see BAS Wooden strips................................. 171
Brake fluid.......................................... 248 CD player/CD changer
Display message (luxury multi- Operating (on-board computer,
function steering wheel)................. 185 luxury multi-function steering
Display message (multi-function wheel)............................................... 99
steering wheel)............................... 180
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 6

6 Index
Central locking Cornering lights

Automatic door locking feature Display message............................. 187
(on-board computer, luxury multi- Cruise control..................................... 108
function steering wheel)................. 104 Display message............................. 182
Key................................................... 58 Cup holder.......................................... 131
Central locking/unlocking button...... 59 Current fuel consumption
Central unlocking On-board computer (multi-func-
Key................................................... 58 tion steering wheel).................... 93, 96
Centre console
Overview........................................... 30 D
Changing a wheel
Dashboard
see Flat tyre
Cleaning......................................... 170
Checklist (off-road driving)............... 159
see Instrument cluster
Child-proof locks
Date
Rear doors........................................ 50
Setting (on-board computer,
Children
luxury multi-function steering
In the vehicle.................................... 41
wheel)............................................. 102
Restraint systems............................. 41
Setting (on-board computer,
Child seat
multi-function steering wheel).......... 93
Automatic recognition...................... 43
Daytime driving lights.......................... 75
Automatic recognition (malfunc-
On-board computer (luxury multi-
tion)................................................ 200
function steering wheel)................. 102
Display message............................. 182
Delayed switch-off
ISOFIX............................................... 49
Exterior lighting (luxury multi-
Recommendations............................ 46
Suitable positions............................. 44
Interior lighting (on-board com-
Cigarette lighter................................. 138
puter, luxury multi-function steer-
Cleaning the panorama sliding
ing wheel)....................................... 103
sunroof................................................ 170
Diesel
Cleaning the windscreen .................. 169
Low outside temperatures.............. 146
Collapsible wheel
Diesel engine
Technical data................................ 253
Winter driving................................. 146
COMAND display
Digital speedometer............................. 96
Cleaning......................................... 170
Dipped-beam headlamps
Constant headlamp mode
Display message............................. 188
see Daytime driving lights
Symmetrical................................... 162
Convenience closing............................ 82
Display message................................ 176
Convenience opening........................... 82
Display messages
Coolant
Service interval display................... 167
Checking the level.......................... 149
Symbol messages........................... 182
Display message (luxury multi-
Text messages................................ 177
Distance recorder
Display message (multi-function
see Total distance recorder
steering wheel)....................... 180, 186
see Trip meter
Mixture ratio................................... 247
Temperature gauge........................... 90
Warning lamp.................................. 202
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 7

Index 7
Door E
Automatic locking............................. 59
Display message (luxury multi- Easy-entry/exit feature
function steering wheel)......... 183, 196 On-board computer (luxury multi-
Display message (multi-function function steering wheel)................. 104
steering wheel)....................... 181, 183 EASY-ENTRY feature............................. 67
Emergency locking......................... 214 EASY-EXIT feature................................ 67
Emergency unlocking...................... 213 EBV (electronic brake force distri-
Opening (from the inside)................. 58 bution)................................................... 54
Door control panel Display message (luxury multi-
Overview........................................... 32 function steering wheel)................. 185
Drinks holder Display message (multi-function
see Cup holder steering wheel)............................... 179
Drive program Electrical/electronic equipment
Manual.............................................. 88 Retrofitting..................................... 243
Driver's airbag...................................... 38 Electronic brake-force distribution
Driver's knee airbag............................. 39 see EBV
Driver's seat position........................... 73 Electronic Stability Program
Driving abroad.................................... 162 see ESP®
Driving information Electronic Traction Support
Fording .................................. 157, 161 see ETS
Off-road.......................................... 158 e mark................................................. 243
Tyre ruts......................................... 162 Emergency key element
Driving safety system.......................... 51 Lost................................................ 212
ABS................................................... 51 Emergency locking
Adaptive brake lamps....................... 52 Vehicle............................................ 214
BAS................................................... 52 Emergency release
EBV................................................... 54 Fuel filler flap.................................. 215
Driving safety systems Emergency running mode
ESP® ................................................ 52 Automatic transmission.................. 209
Driving system................................... 108 Emergency spare wheel
Cruise control................................. 108 Assembly........................................ 227
Parktronic....................................... 113 Storage location............................. 175
Speedtronic.................................... 110 see Flat tyre
Driving systems Emergency unlocking
Reversing camera........................... 115 Tailgate........................................... 214
Driving tip Vehicle............................................ 213
Braking........................................... 156 Engine.................................................. 249
Trailer towing.................................. 164 Running irregularly.......................... 208
Winter............................................. 156 Starting problems................... 207, 208
Driving tips Starting with the key......................... 83
Driving abroad ............................... 162 Switching off..................................... 85
Driving on wet roads ...................... 157 Engine diagnostics warning lamp
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 105 ............................................................. 203
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Engine electronics.............................. 243
(vehicles with off-road engineering Malfunction..................................... 207
package).............................................. 105 Engine number................................... 245
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 8

8 Index
Engine oil ........................................... 246 Fuel...................................................... 245

Consumption ................................. 148 Diesel............................................. 145
Display message............................. 195 Loss................................................ 206
Filler neck....................................... 148 Petrol.............................................. 145
Topping up...................................... 148 Fuel consumption................................. 95
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)... 52 Current (on-board computer,
Activating/deactivating.................... 53 multi-function steering wheel)
Display message (luxury multi- ................................................... 93, 96
function steering wheel)......... 179, 183 Notes...................................... 242, 246
Display message (multi-function Vehicle data.................................... 249
steering wheel)....................... 178, 179 see Trip computer(on-board computer)
Trailer stabilisation........................... 53 Fuel filler flap
Warning lamp........................... 52, 201 Emergency release......................... 215
ETS (Electronic Traction Support)....... 53 Opening/closing ............................ 144
Exterior lighting Fuel filter
Delayed switch-off (luxury multi- Display message (luxury multi-
function steering wheel)................. 103 function steering wheel)................. 187
Exterior mirrors Display message (multi-function
Adjusting.......................................... 67 steering wheel)............................... 180
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)........... 68 Fuel level
Folding in/out (automatically).......... 68 Calling up the range (on-board
Folding in/out (electrically).............. 68 computer, luxury multi-function
Folding in (on-board computer, steering wheel)................................. 96
luxury multi-function steering Calling up the range (on-board
wheel)............................................. 104 computer, multi-function steering
Malfunction..................................... 211 wheel)............................................... 93
Parking position................................ 69 Display........................................ 24, 26
Resetting.......................................... 68 Fuel line
Storing settings................................ 69 Malfunction..................................... 206
Exterior view Fuel tank
Overview........................................... 22 Defect............................................. 206
Fuse allocation chart......................... 239
F Fuse box
Dashboard...................................... 239
Fire extinguisher................................ 174 Engine compartment...................... 239
First-aid kit......................................... 174 Luggage compartment.................... 240
Flat tyre Fuses................................................... 238
Equipment...................................... 222
Preparing the vehicle...................... 222
G
TIREFIT kit....................................... 222
Floormat.............................................. 141 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.......... 242
Foglamps Glove compartment........................... 130
Display message............................. 193 Gradient-climbing capability (max-
Fording........................................ 157, 161 imum).................................................. 160
Frequencies
Telephone....................................... 244
Front airbag.......................................... 38
Front-passenger airbag........................ 38
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 9

Index 9
H Intelligent Light System...................... 77

Headlamp cleaning system............... 149 function steering wheel)................. 192
Headlamps On-board computer (luxury multi-
Cleaning......................................... 169 function steering wheel)................. 103
Cleaning system............................... 77 Interior lighting
Misting up....................................... 210 Automatic control system................. 79
Head restraint Emergency lighting........................... 79
Adjusting (front).......................... 63, 64 Manual control.................................. 79
NECK-PRO........................................ 40 On-board computer (luxury multi-
Removing (rear)................................ 64 function steering wheel)................. 103
Resetting triggered head Reading lamp.................................... 79
restraints........................................ 215 Interior motion sensor......................... 55
Head restraints ISOFIX child seat securing system..... 49
Adjusting (rear)................................. 64
Heating
J
see Air conditioning
High-pressure cleaners..................... 168 Jack...................................................... 175
Hill start assist..................................... 84 Operation........................................ 227
Hook.................................................... 136 Jump-starting...................................... 234
Jump leads...................................... 234
I
K
Immobiliser........................................... 54
Indicator and warning lamp Key......................................................... 58
Automatic child seat recognition Changing the battery...................... 216
(malfunction).................................. 200 Checking the battery...................... 216
Brakes (red).................................... 202 Display message (multi-function
Coolant........................................... 202 steering wheel)............................... 181
Engine diagnostics.......................... 203 Loss................................................ 212
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF......... 43, 200 Malfunction..................................... 212
Reserve fuel.................................... 204 Modifying the programming.............. 58
Seat belt......................................... 203 Key positions
SRS........................................... 35, 202 Key................................................... 61
Thermotronic (malfunction)............ 199 Kickdown........................................ 88, 89
Indicator and warning lamps............ 201
Indicator lamps L
see Warning and indicator lamps Lamps
Instrument cluster............................... 90 see Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer (luxury multi- Lashing eyelets.................................. 133
function steering wheel)................. 101 Licence plate lighting
Overview (luxury multi-function
Display message............................. 192
steering wheel)................................. 26
Lighting
Overview (multi-function steering
see Lights
wheel)............................................... 24
Lights
Active light function.......................... 77
Automatic headlamp mode............... 75
Cornering light function.................... 78
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 10

10 Index
Dipped-beam headlamps.................. 75 Lumbar support.................................... 65

Display messages (luxury multi- 4-way................................................ 65
function steering wheel)................. 194 Luxury multi-function steering
Display messages (multi-function wheel..................................................... 93
steering wheel)............................... 194 Overview........................................... 29
Foglamps.................................... 75, 78
Hazard warning lamps...................... 76 M
Headlamp flasher.............................. 76
Headlamp range............................... 77 Main-beam headlamps
Light switch...................................... 74 Display message............................. 192
Main-beam headlamps...................... 76 Maintenance
Motorway mode................................ 78 Battery............................................ 232
Rear foglamp.................................... 75 Manual drive program......................... 88
Switching the daytime driving Maximum speed................................. 249
lights on/off (on-board computer, Memory card (on-board computer,
luxury multi-function steering luxury multi-function steering
wheel)............................................. 102 wheel).................................................... 99
Switching the exterior lighting Memory function.................................. 69
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Menu (luxury multi-function steer-
board computer, luxury multi- ing wheel)
function steering wheel)................. 103 Audio................................................ 98
Switching the Intelligent Light Menu overview.................................. 95
System on or off (on-board com- Navigation......................................... 97
puter, luxury multi-function steer- Service............................................ 101
ing wheel)....................................... 103 Telephone......................................... 99
Switching the surround lighting Trip computer................................... 95
on/off (on-board computer, Menu (multi-function steering wheel)
luxury multi-function steering Menu overview.................................. 92
wheel)............................................. 103 Range/current fuel consumption...... 93
Turn signals...................................... 76 Setting the time/date....................... 93
LIM indicator lamp Standard display............................... 92
Cruise control................................. 108 Trip computer................................... 92
Variable Speedtronic...................... 111 Messages
Loading guidelines............................. 129 see Display messages
Locking see Warning and indicator lamps
Automatic......................................... 59 Minispare emergency spare wheel
Emergency locking......................... 214 Technical data................................ 253
From the inside (central locking Mirrors
button).............................................. 59 Sun visor......................................... 138
Luggage compartment enlarge- see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror
ment.................................................... 132 Mobile phone...................................... 140
Luggage compartment floor Installation...................................... 243
opening/closing............................. 136 On-board computer (luxury multi-
stowage well, under........................ 136 function steering wheel)................... 99
Luggage cover.................................... 133 Modifying the programming
Luggage net Key................................................... 58
Front-passenger footwell................ 131
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 11

Index 11
MP3 Convenience submenu................... 104

Operating (on-board computer, Display messages........................... 176
luxury multi-function steering Factory settings submenu.............. 104
wheel)............................................... 99 Instrument cluster submenu........... 101
Multi-function display Lights submenu.............................. 102
Luxury multi-function steering Navigation menu............................... 97
wheel................................................ 94 Overview........................................... 95
Multi-function steering wheel........... 91 Service menu.................................. 101
Multi-function steering wheel............. 91 Settings menu................................ 101
Overview........................................... 28 Standard display submenu................ 95
Multi-function steering wheel (12- Telephone menu............................... 99
button) Time/date submenu....................... 102
see Luxury multi-function steering wheel Trip computer menu......................... 95
Vehicle submenu............................ 104
N On-board computer (multi-func-
tion steering wheel)............................. 91
Navigation Display messages........................... 176
On-board computer (luxury multi- Overview........................................... 92
function steering wheel)................... 97 Range............................................... 93
NECK-PRO head restraints.................. 40 Standard display............................... 92
Resetting after being triggered....... 215 Time/date........................................ 93
Notes on running in a new vehicle... 144 Trip computer................................... 92
On-board computer menu (luxury
O multi-function steering wheel).......... 101
Odometer One-touch gearshifting........................ 86
Total distance recorder............... 92, 95 Operating system
Trip meter................................... 92, 95 see On-board computer (luxury
Off-road multi-function steering wheel)
4MATIC........................................... 105 see On-board computer (multi-
DSR................................................ 105 function steering wheel)
Off-road ABS..................................... 51 Outside temperature display ............. 90
Off-road drive program................... 107 Override feature
Off-road ABS......................................... 51 Rear side windows............................ 50
Off-road drive program (vehicles
with off-road engineering package). 107 P
Off-road driving Paint code........................................... 244
Checklist......................................... 159 Panorama sliding sunroof................. 127
Information..................................... 158 Rain closing feature........................ 128
Off-road ESP®........................................ 54 Resetting........................................ 129
Off-road terrain Parking.................................................. 84
Off-road ESP..................................... 54 Parking aid
Oil Exterior mirror on the front-
Consumption.................................. 148 passenger side.................................. 69
Topping up...................................... 148 Parktronic....................................... 113
On-board computer (luxury multi- Reversing camera........................... 115
function steering wheel)...................... 93 Parking brake....................................... 84
Audio menu...................................... 98 Display message............................. 185
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 12

12 Index
Parking lamps R
Display message............................. 194
Parking lock Radio
Releasing manually (automatic Selecting a station (on-board
transmission).................................. 215 computer, luxury multi-function
Parking position steering wheel)................................. 98
Exterior mirror on the front- see separate operating instructions
passenger side.................................. 69 Rain closing feature
Parktronic........................................... 113 Panorama sliding sunroof............... 128
Activating/deactivating.................. 115 Range
Malfunction..................................... 209 Calling up (on-board computer,
Range of the sensors...................... 113 luxury multi-function steering
Trailer towing.................................. 115 wheel)............................................... 96
Warning display.............................. 114 Calling up (on-board computer,
PARKTRONIC multi-function steering wheel).......... 93
Cleaning the sensors...................... 171 Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning tus indicator......................................... 72
lamp.............................................. 43, 200 Rear foglamp
Performance....................................... 249 Display message............................. 193
Permanent display Rear seat backrest
On-board computer (luxury multi- Folding forwards/back................... 132
function steering wheel)................. 101 Rear-view mirror
Permanent four-wheel drive Adjusting.......................................... 67
see 4MATIC Anti-dazzle (manual)......................... 67
Permanent Speedtronic..................... 112 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)........... 68
Petrol Rear window
Minimum grade .............................. 145 Cleaning......................................... 169
see Fuel Rear window heating......................... 125
Plastic trim Rear window wiper.............................. 80
Cleaning......................................... 170 Replacing the wiper blade............... 221
Power supply (trailer)........................ 166 Refuelling............................................ 144
Power window switch Replacing the wiper blades............... 220
see Side windows Reserve
Pre-emptive occupant safety system Warning lamp.................................. 204
Reserve fuel........................................ 245
see PRE-SAFE®
Display message............................. 198
PRE-SAFE® system............................... 40
Fuel tank......................................... 245
Display message............................. 181
Warning lamp.................................. 204
Program selector button
Restraint system
Automatic transmission.................... 87
see SRS
Pulling away.......................................... 83
Restraint systems
For children...................................... 41
Rev counter........................................... 90
Reverse gear
Engaging (automatic transmission)... 86
Reversing camera.............................. 115
Cleaning......................................... 172
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 13

Index 13
Reversing lamps Settings

Display message............................. 194 Calling up a stored setting................ 69
Roller blind Factory (on-board computer,
see Roller sunblind luxury multi-function steering
Roller sunblind wheel)............................................. 104
Panorama sliding sunroof............... 128 On-board computer (luxury multi-
Roof load (maximum)......................... 249 function steering wheel)................. 101
Roof rack............................................. 137 Shift ranges
Route Automatic transmission.................... 86
see Route guidance Indicator in the multi-function dis-
Route guidance play .................................................. 85
On-board computer (luxury multi- Sidebag................................................. 39
function steering wheel)................... 97 Side window
Fault............................................... 211
S Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 169
Safety net............................................ 134 Opening/closing............................... 80
Seat Ski rack............................................... 137
Adjusting.................................... 62, 63 Sliding sunroof
Correct driver's seat position........... 73 see Panorama sliding sunroof
Storing settings................................ 69 Snow chains....................................... 155
Seat belt
Socket
Adjusting the height.......................... 72
Cockpit........................................... 139
Centre rear-compartment seat......... 72
Luggage compartment.................... 140
Display message....................... 72, 183
Rear compartment.......................... 139
Fastening.......................................... 70
Spare wheel
Warning lamp........................... 72, 203
Technical data................................ 253
Seat covers
Speed limiter
Cleaning......................................... 170
Speedtronic.................................... 110
Seat heating.......................................... 65
Speedometer
Seat ventilation
Additional (on-board computer,
Malfunction indicator lamp............. 199
Securing a load................................... 133
wheel)............................................... 96
Selector lever Segments.......................................... 90
Positions........................................... 86 Selecting display units (on-board
Service computer, luxury multi-function
On-board computer (luxury multi- steering wheel)............................... 101
function steering wheel)................. 101 Speedtronic........................................ 110
Service indicator................................ 167 Display message............................. 182
Service products................................ 245 Permanent...................................... 112
Brake fluid...................................... 248 Variable.......................................... 111
Coolant........................................... 247 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Engine oil........................................ 246 tem)....................................................... 35
Fuel................................................. 245 Display message............................. 196
Windscreen washer fluid................. 249 Warning lamp........................... 35, 202
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 14

14 Index
Standard display T
On-board computer (luxury multi-
function steering wheel)................... 95 Tailgate
On-board computer (multi-func- Display message............................. 183
tion steering wheel).......................... 92 Emergency unlocking...................... 214
Station Limiting the opening angle................ 61
see Radio Tail lamp
Steering wheel Display message............................. 191
Adjusting.......................................... 66 Tail lamps
Buttons (on-board computer, changing......................................... 220
luxury multi-function steering Display message............................. 191
wheel)............................................... 93 Tail pipes
Buttons (on-board computer, Cleaning......................................... 171
multi-function steering wheel).......... 91 Tank
Storing settings................................ 69 see Fuel tank
Steering wheel boss Tank capacity..................................... 245
Cleaning......................................... 170 Technical data
Steering wheel gearshift paddles....... 88 GLK 280 4MATIC............................ 249
Stowage compartment...................... 129 GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC..................... 250
Armrest (under).............................. 130 GLK 350 4MATIC............................ 249
Glove compartment........................ 130 Trailer loads.................................... 254
Rear seat armrest........................... 131 Tyres............................................... 252
Stowage compartments Wheels............................................ 252
Under driver's seat/front- Telephone
passenger seat............................... 130 see Mobile phone
Submenu (luxury multi-function Telephone compartment................... 130
steering wheel) Temperature
Convenience................................... 104 Coolant............................................. 90
Factory settings.............................. 104 Outside temperature......................... 90
Instrument cluster.......................... 101 Thermatic
Lights ............................................. 102 Malfunction indicator lamp............. 199
Standard display............................... 95 Thermotronic
Time/date...................................... 102 Malfunction indicator lamp............. 199
Vehicle............................................ 104 Tightening torque............................... 231
Summer opening Time
see Convenience opening Setting (on-board computer,
Sun visor............................................. 137 luxury multi-function steering
Supplemental Restraint System wheel)............................................. 102
see SRS Setting (on-board computer,
Surround lighting multi-function steering wheel)
On-board computer (luxury multi- ......................................................... 93
function steering wheel)................. 103 TIREFIT kit
Switching off the alarm Using.............................................. 222
ATA................................................... 55 TopTether.............................................. 49
Total distance recorder................. 92, 95
Tow-away protection........................... 55
Towing................................................. 238
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 15

Index 15
Towing eye Tyres

Fitting............................................. 237 Direction of rotation....................... 152
Removing........................................ 238 General notes................................. 150
Trailer Technical data................................ 252
7-pin connector.............................. 166 Tyre tread............................................ 152
function steering wheel)................. 188 U
Display messages (multi-function
Unladen weight.................................. 249
steering wheel)............................... 188
Unlocking
Power supply.................................. 166
Trailer coupling Emergency unlocking...................... 213
From the inside (central unlocking
see Trailer tow hitch
button).............................................. 59
Trailer loads
Technical data................................ 254
Trailer tow hitch V
Cleaning......................................... 172 Variable Speedtronic......................... 111
Trailer towing Vehicle
Driving tips..................................... 164 Emergency unlocking............. 213, 214
ESP®................................................. 53 Individual settings........................... 101
Mounting dimensions..................... 253 Leaving parked up.......................... 213
Parktronic....................................... 115 Towing............................................ 238
Transmission output (maximum) Transporting................................... 238
Telephone/two-way radio............... 243 Vehicle battery................................... 232
Transport (vehicle)............................. 238 Vehicle dimensions.................... 242, 249
Travelling uphill.................................. 159 Vehicle electronics............................ 243
Trim strips Vehicle identification number
Cleaning......................................... 171 (VIN) ................................................... 244
Trip computer Vehicle identification plates............. 244
On-board computer (luxury multi- Vehicle tool kit................................... 175
function steering wheel)................... 95 Vehicle weights.................................. 249
On-board computer (multi-func- Video DVD
tion steering wheel).......................... 92 Operating (on-board computer,
Trip meter....................................... 92, 95 luxury multi-function steering
Resetting (on-board computer, wheel)............................................... 99
wheel)............................................... 96 W
Resetting (on-board computer,
multi-function steering wheel).......... 92 Warning and indicator lamp
Turn signal ABS (yellow).................................... 201
Display message..................... 188, 190 LIM (cruise control)......................... 108
Two-way radio LIM (variable Speedtronic).............. 111
Installation...................................... 243 Warning and indicator lamps
Tyre grip.............................................. 157 ESP®......................................... 52, 201
Tyre pressure ..................................... 152 Malfunction indicator lamp............. 199
Display message............................. 181 Warning tone...................................... 205
Tyre pressure loss warning system Warning triangle................................. 174
............................................................. 153 Washer fluid
Display message............................. 198
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 16

16 Index
Washer fluid reservoir............... 149, 249

Filling capacity................................ 249
Wearing seat belts............................... 70
Wheel bolts
Tightening torque............................ 231
Wheel chock
Use................................................. 176
Wheels
General notes................................. 150
Interchanging.................................. 154
Technical data................................ 252
Windowbag........................................... 39
Windowbags
Display message (multi-function
steering wheel)............................... 182
Windows
Cleaning......................................... 169
Cleaning the windscreen ............... 169
see Side windows
Windscreen washer fluid................... 249
Topping up...................................... 149
Windscreen washer system...... 149, 249
Windscreen wipers.............................. 79
Cleaning......................................... 169
Malfunction..................................... 210
Replacing the wiper blades............. 220
Winter diesel...................................... 146
Winter driving............................. 155, 156
Winter tyres........................................ 155
Limit speed (on-board computer,
wheel)............................................. 113
Wooden trim
Cleaning......................................... 171
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 17

Introduction 17
Protection of the environment Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
H Environmental note Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated stationary.
environmental protection. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
The objectives are for the natural resources from the vehicle in front.
which form the basis of our existence on this
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
which takes the requirements of both nature Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
and humanity into account. only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.
You too can help to protect the environment Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally-responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, Returning used vehicles
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
the following factors: Mercedes-Benz will take back your
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
mentally-responsible manner, in accordance
Ryour personal driving style with the European Union (EU) End of Life
You can influence both factors. Vehicles Directive.
You should bear the following in mind: The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
Operating conditions vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
accordance with national regulations. For
several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
sumption.
meeting all the legal requirements for a
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are design which allows for recycling and re-use.
always correct. There is a network of return points and dis-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
tion. parts are constantly being developed and
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need improved. This means that your Mercedes-
them. Benz will also continue to meet even the
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute increased recycling quotas in the future in
to environmental protection. You should good time. You can obtain further information
therefore adhere to the service intervals. from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
or your national hotline number.
Ralways have maintenance work carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Personal driving style
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 18

18 Introduction
Operating safety your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn

might lead to an accident. This also applies to
Safety notes vehicles which are equipped with underbody
G Risk of accident and injury protection.
Always have work on the vehicle carried out You should therefore drive over obstacles
by a qualified specialist workshop. In particu- slowly and prevent the vehicle from bottom-
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-rela- ing out when driving off-road. If necessary,
ted systems as well as maintenance work have your vehicle inspected at a qualified spe-
must be carried out at a qualified specialist cialist workshop.
workshop. The workshop must have the nec-
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry G Risk of accident
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ware is carried out incorrectly, the equipment
Service Centre for this purpose. could stop functioning. The electronic sys-
tems are networked via interfaces. Tampering
G Risk of accident and injury with these electronic systems could cause
Some safety systems only function when the malfunctions in systems which have not been
engine is running. You should therefore never modified. Such malfunctions can seriously
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, compromise the vehicle’s operating safety
the safety systems of your vehicle may not and your own safety as well.
function correctly and as a result will no lon- Have all work on and modifications to elec-
ger protect you and other persons as inten- tronic components carried out at a qualified
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may workshop.
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an
accident.
Vehicle registration
G Risk of accident and injury
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations
to carry out technical inspections on certain
made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables
vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
under coverings, could cause the safety sys-
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
The safety systems would thus no longer pro- authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
tect you and other persons as intended. In has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
addition, there is a risk that you may lose con- Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci- vehicle is not registered in your name with
dent. Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g.
registration data.
installations or modifications, should there-
fore be carried out at a qualified specialist It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
workshop. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
G Risk of accident about any change in address or vehicle own-
If you drive over obstacles at high speed or if ership.
the vehicle bottoms out in rough terrain, it
could cause heavy impacts to the vehicle
underbody, tyres or wheels. This could cause
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 19

Introduction 19
Correct use
Observe the following information when using
your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual

Rnational road traffic regulations
Rnational road traffic licensing regulations
G Risk of injury
Various warning stickers are affixed to your
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
tion, and the attention of others, to various
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn-
ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states
that you may do so.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or
others could be injured by failing to recognise
certain dangers.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 20

20
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 21

21
Exterior view ....................................... 22

Cockpit ................................................. 23
Instrument cluster .............................. 24
At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel ............ 28
Centre console .................................... 30
Overhead control panel ...................... 31
Door control panel .............................. 32
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 22

22 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Luggage compartment 59 C Exterior mirrors 67
Vehicle tool kit 175 D Windscreen wipers 79
; Rear window heating 125 E Opening the bonnet 146
= Lights 218 Engine oil 148
? Fuel filler flap 144 Coolant 149
A F Towing 236
Demisting the windscreen 124
Cleaning the windows 169 G Tyres and wheels 150
B Flat tyre 222
Panorama sliding sunroof* 127
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 23

Cockpit 23
Cockpit
At a glance
: Automatic transmission*: D Adjusts the steering wheel
steering-wheel gearshift manually 66
paddles* 88 E Adjusts the steering wheel
; Cruise control lever 108 electrically* 66
= Instrument cluster 24 F Combination switch 76
? Parktronic* warning dis- G Parking brake 84
play 114 H Releases the parking brake 84
A Overhead control panel 31 I Light switch 74
B Operates Thermatic/ J Adjusts the headlamp
Thermotronic* 117 range 77
C Ignition lock 61
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 24

24 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Vehicles with a multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)
At a glance
i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 25).
Function Page
: Fuel gauge
; Coolant temperature gauge 90
= Speedometer
? Rev counter 90
A Status indicator for auto-
matic transmission 85
B Multi-function display 91
C Outside temperature dis-
play1 90
Vehicles with Speed-
tronic*: stored limit speed 110
Clock 93
D Brightness control
1 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is shown instead of the outside temperature.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 25

Instrument cluster 25
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
: Main-beam indicator lamp 76 E Engine diagnostics warning
lamp 203
; Reserve fuel warning lamp 204
F SRS warning lamp 202
= Coolant warning lamp 202
G Diesel engine: preglow indi-
? Turn signal indicator lamp 76 cator lamp 83
A ESP® warning lamp 201 H Turn signal indicator lamp 76
B Brake system warning lamp 202 I Dipped-beam indicator
C Seat belt warning lamp 203 lamp 75
D ABS warning lamp 201
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 26

Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 buttons*)

At a glance
i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 27).
Function Page
: Fuel gauge
; Coolant temperature gauge 90
= Speedometer
? Segments 90
A Multi-function display 94
B Rev counter 90
C Outside temperature dis-
play2 90
Additional speedometer 101
D Display for automatic trans-
mission 85
E Clock 102
F Brightness control
2 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the additional speedometer display is always shown instead of the outside
temperature.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 27

Instrument cluster 27
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
: Main-beam indicator lamp 76 D Seat belt warning lamp 203
; Turn signal indicator lamp 76 E Dipped-beam indicator
lamp 75
= ESP® warning lamp 201
F Coolant warning lamp 202
? Turn signal indicator lamp 76
G Brake system warning lamp 202
A Diesel engine: preglow indi-
cator lamp 83 H Engine diagnostics warning
lamp 203
B SRS warning lamp 202
I Reserve fuel warning lamp 204
C ABS warning lamp 201
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 28

28 Multi-function steering wheel
Multi-function steering wheel

Multi-function steering wheel (4 button)
At a glance

: Multi-function display 91 A C
; • selects submenus
COMAND APS* or audio
system*, see separate • scrolls through lists
operating instructions. • confirms a selection
= W B V
• increases the volume • press briefly: selects a
• sets the date/time menu
• Press and hold: selects
? X the standard display
• reduces the volume
• sets the date/time
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 29

Multi-function steering wheel 29
Luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 button)
At a glance
: Multi-function display 94 A % Back or deactivates
; voice control*
COMAND APS* or audio
system*, see separate B =; Selects a menu 95
operating instructions. 9: Selects a sub-
= 6~ Accepts or menu or scrolls through
rejects/ends a call* 100 lists 95
WX Increases/ a Confirms selections
reduces the volume and hides display mes-
sages
8 Mute
? ? Activates voice con-
trol*; see separate operat-
ing instructions.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 30

30 Centre console
Centre console
At a glance

: Hazard warning lamps 76 E Parktronic* 113
; ATA indicator lamp* 54 F Ashtray* 138
= 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG Cigarette lighter* 138
OFF warning lamp 43 12 V socket 139
? ESP® 52 G Selector lever 85
A Operates COMAND APS* H Cup holder
or the audio system* I Stowage compartment/
B Adjusts the seat heating* 65 telephone compartment 130
C J COMAND/Audio control-
Off-road drive program* 107
ler*
D DSR (Downhill Speed Reg-
K Program selector button 87
ulation)* 105
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 31

Overhead control panel 31
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear B 3 Opens/closes the
interior lighting on/off 79 panorama sliding sunroof
with roller sunblinds* 127
; | Switches the auto-
matic interior lighting con- C ê Deactivates the inte-
trol on/off 79 rior motion sensor* 55
= p Switches the right- D p Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 79 hand reading lamp on/off 79
? ë Deactivates tow- E c Switches the front
away protection* 55 interior lighting on/off 79
A Rear-view mirror 67
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 32

32 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: Opens the door 58 C \ Selects the right exte-
rior mirror 67
; % & Locks/unlocks
the vehicle 59 D 7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors 68
= Adjusts the seat electri-
cally* 63 E W Opens/closes the
front side windows 80
? r 45 =
Stores settings for the seat, F W Opens/closes the
exterior mirrors and steer- rear side windows 80
ing wheel* 69
G n Override feature for
A Z Selects the left exte- the rear side windows 50
rior mirror 67
B ª Folds the exterior mir-
rors in/out* 68
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 33

33
Occupant safety .................................. 34

Driving safety systems ....................... 51
Anti-theft systems .............................. 54
Safety
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 34

34 Occupant safety
Occupant safety Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

occupant in the best position in relation
Notes on occupant safety to the airbag.
Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the
force limiters and airbags, are complemen- seat belt can more adequately prevent
Safety
tary, coordinated restraint systems. They the occupant from being propelled
reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre- towards the point of the impact, and is
defined types of accident situations and, thus better suited to prevent injury.
thereby, increase occupant safety. However,
Therefore, in accident situations where an
seat belts and airbags generally do not pro-
airbag is deployed, it only provides protec-
tect against objects penetrating the vehicle
tion in addition to the seat belt if the seat
from the outside.
belt is being worn correctly.
To ensure that the restraint systems can
deliver their full potential protection, you G Risk of accident and injury
should ensure that: Always have maintenance work carried out at
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted a qualified specialist workshop which has the
properly (Y page 62). necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
(Y page 70).
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are pose.
deployed (Y page 37). In particular, work relevant to safety or on
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly safety-related systems must be carried out at
(Y page 66). a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is
Rthe
not carried out correctly, the operating safety
restraint systems have not been modi-
of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk
fied.
of an accident and injury.
i An airbag increases the protection of
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. G Risk of injury
However, airbags are only an additional The restraint system may not work as inten-
restraint system which complements, but ded if the following components have been
does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle modified or work on these components has
occupants must wear their seat belt cor- not been performed correctly:
rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat
equipped with airbags. This is because – on belts and anchorages, belt tensioners, belt
the one hand – airbags are not deployed in force limiters, airbags
all types of accident, as in some situations
Rwiring
airbag deployment would not increase the
protection afforded to vehicle occupants, Rnetworked electronic systems
provided they are wearing their seat belt Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail, e.g.
correctly. On the other hand, airbag deploy- in the event of an accident in which the decel-
ment only provides increased protection if eration force would normally be high enough
the seat belt is worn correctly because: to trigger the systems, or they could be trig-
gered unintentionally. Never carry out any
modifications on the restraint systems.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 35

Occupant safety 35
Never tamper with electronic components Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
and their software. limiters and airbags
In the event of a collision, the sensor in the
airbag control unit evaluates important phys-
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) ical data such as duration, direction and force
Safety
The SRS reduces the risk of occupants com- of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration.
ing into contact with the vehicle's interior in Based on the evaluation of this data and
the event of an accident. It can also reduce depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudi-
the forces to which occupants are subjected nal deceleration in a collision, in the first
during an accident. stage the airbag control unit pre-emptively
triggers the belt tensioners.
The SRS consists of:
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
gered if the belt tongue is correctly
Rbelt tensioners engaged in the seat belt buckle.
Rbelt force limiters The front airbags are only deployed if there is
Rairbags an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in
a longitudinal direction.
The 6SRS warning lamp Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front
airbags. When the first activation threshold is
The SRS functions are checked regularly reached, the front airbag is filled with enough
when you turn on the ignition and when the propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions The front airbag is only fully inflated if a sec-
can be detected in good time. ond threshold is reached within a few milli-
The 6 warning lamp in the instrument seconds, due to the control unit having detec-
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched ted further deceleration.
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and
airbags
G Risk of injury In the first stage of a collision, the airbag con-
If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems trol unit evaluates the duration and direction
may be activated unintentionally or not be of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in
deployed in the event of an accident with order to determine whether it is necessary to
heavy braking. trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 warn- The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
ing lamp: thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
Rdoes not light up when you switch on the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc-
ignition ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag
must be deployed during – and not at the end
Rdoes not go out after the engine has been of – the collision.
running for a few seconds
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of
Rlights up again once the engine is running
accidents. They are controlled by complex
In this case, have SRS checked immediately sensor technology and evaluation logic.
at a qualified specialist workshop. This process is pre-emptive in nature as
airbag deployment must take place during
the impact and must be adapted to provide
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 36

36 Occupant safety
calculated, additional protection for the occupied. The belt tensioners could other-
vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are wise be triggered in an accident.
deployed in an accident. If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt
The different airbag systems work inde- force limiter, the force exerted by the seat
pendently of each other. However, the belt on the seat occupant is reduced.
deployment of each individual system will
Safety
Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an

depend on the type of accident determined accident, pulling them close against the body.
by the control system in the first stages of
the collision (head-on collision, side impact i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect
and overturn) and the extent of the acci- seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat
dent (in particular, the vehicle's rate of belts.
deceleration or acceleration). Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- towards the backrest.
tion and the direction of the force are basi- The front belt force limiters are synchronised
cally determined by: with the front airbags, which distribute a pro-
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- portion of the deceleration forces exerted on
sion the occupant over a greater area.
Rthe
The belt tensioners cannot be triggered when
collision angle
the ignition is switched on unless:
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
Rthe
restraint systems are operational, see
cle
6 warning lamp
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehi-
each lap-shoulder belt in the front of the
cle
vehicle
Factors which can only be seen and measured
Depending on the type and severity of an
after a collision has occurred do not play a
accident, the belt tensioners may be trig-
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag,
gered:
nor do they provide an indication of it.
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-
The vehicle may be deformed significantly,
sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-
airbag being deployed. This is the case if only
ing the initial stages of impact
parts which are relatively easily deformed are
affected and the necessary deceleration does Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle
not occur. Conversely, airbags may be is subjected to high lateral acceleration/
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only deceleration
minor deformations. For example, this is the If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
case if very rigid vehicle parts such as longi- bang and a small amount of powder may also
tudinal body members are affected and suf- be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
ficient deceleration occurs as a result. affect your hearing. The powder that escapes
does not generally constitute a health hazard.
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The 6 warning lamp lights up.
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts G Risk of injury
in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. If the seat belt tensioners have been trig-
! Do not engage the seat belt tongue on the gered, they provide no additional protection
front-passenger's seat if the seat is not in the event of another accident. Therefore,
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 37

Occupant safety 37
have belt tensioners which have been trig- Rmove the front-passenger's seat as far
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work- back as possible, especially if a child is
shop. secured in a child restraint system on the
Comply with safety regulations when dispos- seat.
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children
Safety
Service Centre can provide details of these – must not lean their head into the area of
regulations. the window in which the sidebag/window-
bag is deployed.
Airbags Rrearward-facing child restraint systems
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts must not be fitted to the front-passenger's
the movement of the vehicle occupant. seat unless the front-passenger front air-
bag has been disabled. The front-passenger
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
front airbag of a vehicle fitted with auto-
bang and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang matic child seat recognition* is only disa-
affect your hearing. The powder that escapes bled when a child restraint system with
does not generally constitute a health hazard. automatic child seat recognition is fitted to
The 6 warning lamp lights up. the front-passenger's seat. The
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
The AIRBAG identification indicates the loca-
lamp must be continuously lit.
tion of the airbags.
If the front-passenger's seat of your vehicle
G Risk of injury does not have automatic child seat recog-
Airbags provide additional protection; they nition*, or your rearward-facing child
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. restraint system does not have automatic
Observe the following notes to reduce the risk child seat recognition, children must be
of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is secured in a child restraint system on a
deployed: suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint system to the
Rall vehicle occupants ― in particular preg-
front-passenger's seat, you must move the
nant women ― must wear their seat belt
front-passenger's seat as far back as pos-
correctly at all times and lean back against
sible.
the backrest, which should be positioned
as close to the vertical as possible. The Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp-
head restraint must support the back of the edged objects in pockets of clothing.
head at about eye level. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of
Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall the driver's/front-passenger front airbag,
or under 12 years of age in suitable child particularly when the vehicle is in motion.
restraint systems. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.
Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat Ronly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This
position that is as far away from the airbag allows the airbag to inflate fully. You could
as possible. The driver's seat position must be injured if the airbag is deployed and you
allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The are holding the inside of the steering wheel.
driver's chest should be as far away from
Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the
the middle of the driver's front airbag cover
vehicle.
as possible.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 38

38 Occupant safety
Rmake sure that there are no people, ani- G Risk of injury

mals or objects between the vehicle occu- The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
pants and the area of deployment of the been deployed. Do not touch them; other-
airbag. wise, you may burn yourself.
Rdo not place any objects between the seat Have the airbags checked at a qualified spe-
Safety
backrest and the door. cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are

Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, not protected by the airbags in the event of
coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat another accident.
hooks. Front airbags
Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, The front airbags are designed to increase
to the doors. protection for the driver's and front passeng-
It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries er's head and chest.
caused by an airbag due to the high speed at
which the airbag is required to deploy.
G Risk of injury
The airbag's functionality can only be guaran-
teed if the following parts are not covered and
no badges or stickers are attached to them:
Rpadded steering wheel boss
Rknee airbag cover below the steering col-
umn
Rfront-passenger front airbag cover Driver's front airbag : deploys in front of the
Router side of front seats steering wheel; front-passenger front air-
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
Rside panel next to the rear seat backrest compartment. They are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
G Risk of injury
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
When an airbag deploys, a small amount of longitudinal direction
powder is released. The powder may cause
Rif the system determines that airbag
short-term breathing difficulties to persons
suffering from asthma or other pulmonary deployment can offer additional protection
conditions. to that provided by the seat belt
In order to prevent potential breathing diffi- Rif the seat belt is fastened
culties, you should leave the vehicle as soon Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
as it is safe to do so. You can also open the cle
window to allow fresh air to enter the interior.
Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-
The powder generally does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that there tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a
is a fire in the vehicle. longitudinal direction
On vehicles with automatic child seat recog-
nition in the front-passenger seat*, front-
passenger front airbag ; is only deployed if
the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp in the centre console is not lit
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 39

Occupant safety 39
(Y page 43). This means that there is not a fications to the doors or door trims, e.g. ret-
child restraint system with automatic child rofitting loudspeakers. Damage to the doors
seat recognition* fitted to the front- can affect operation of the sidebags.
passenger seat or that a child restraint sys-
tem with automatic child seat recognition* The purpose of sidebag deployment is to
has been fitted to the front-passenger seat enhance the level of protection for the thorax
Safety
incorrectly. (but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
Driver's knee airbag the impact occurs.
i The driver's knee airbag is only available
in certain countries.
The driver's knee airbag can help reduce the
risk of injury to the knees, thighs and lower
legs.
Front sidebags : and rear sidebags*;

deploy next to the outer seat cushion. They
are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

Driver's knee airbag : is always deployed of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
along with the driver's front airbag and tion, e.g. in a side impact
inflates underneath the steering column. Rindependently of the seat belt use
Sidebags Rindependently of the front airbags
G Risk of injury Rindependently of the belt tensioners
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that, for safety reasons, you Windowbags
only use seat covers that have been approved The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. the level of protection for the head (but not
The seat covers must have a special tear seam chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on
for sidebags. Otherwise, a head/thorax air- the side of the vehicle on which the impact
bag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to occurs.
provide the intended protection in the event The windowbags are integrated into the side
of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can of the roof frame and run from the front door
be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar).
Centre.
G Risk of injury
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Therefore, do not make any modi-
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 40

40 Occupant safety
If you are driving faster than approximately

30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® may take the following
measures in these situations:
Rit tensions the front seat belts.
Ron vehicles with memory functions*: it
Safety
adjusts the front-passenger seat if this is in

an unfavourable position.
Rif the vehicle skids, it closes the panorama
sliding sunroof* and the side windows so
that only a small gap remains.
Windowbags : are deployed:
if the hazardous situation passes without
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse
lateral direction
all settings made by PRE-SAFE®.
Ron the side on which an impact occurs If the seat belts are not released:
Rindependently of the front airbags X Move the backrest or the seat back slightly
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger until the belt tension is reduced.
seat is occupied The locking mechanism releases.
Rindependently of the seat belt use G Risk of injury
Rif the vehicle overturns and the system When adjusting the seat, make sure that
determines that windowbag deployment nobody can become trapped.
can offer additional protection to that pro-
vided by the seat belt ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when adjusting
the seats. You could otherwise damage the
PRE-SAFE®* system seats and the objects.
PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive meas-
ures to protect you in certain hazardous sit-
NECK-PRO head restraints
uations.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of: NECK-PRO head restraints are designed to
increase protection to the driver's and front-
Remergency braking situations, e.g. if the passenger's head and neck. To this end, the
BAS Brake Assist intervenes head restraints on the driver's and front-
Rcritical situations involving driving dynam- passenger seats are moved forwards and
ics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or under- upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of
steers significantly due to physical limits a certain severity when viewed in the direc-
being exceeded tion of travel. This provides better head sup-
port.
G Risk of injury
Head restraint covers prevent the NECK-PRO
head restraints from triggering correctly. Con-
sequently, the NECK-PRO head restraints
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 41

Occupant safety 41
cannot provide the intended level of protec- G Risk of injury

tion. Do not use head restraint covers. An unsecured or an incorrectly positioned
load increases the risk of injury for the child
If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered
and all other occupants, during:
in an accident, you must reset the head
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger Ran accident
Safety
seats (Y page 215). Head restraints that have Ra braking manoeuvre
been triggered are tilted forwards.
Ra sudden change of direction
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
Children in the vehicle vehicle unless they are secured. You will find
further information under "Loading guide-
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure
lines" in the index.
the child using a child restraint system which
is appropriate to the size and age of the child
and is recommended for Mercedes-Benz Child restraint systems
vehicles. You should fit the restraint system Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
to a suitable rear seat. Ensure that the child use the child restraint systems listed under
is secured throughout the trip. (Y page 46).
You can obtain information about the correct
child restraint system from any Mercedes-
G Risk of injury
Benz Service Centre. To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
injury to the child in the event of a sudden
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care change in direction, braking or an accident:
products to clean child restraint systems.
Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
Information about this can be obtained
twelve years of age must always be secured
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
in special child restraint systems on a suit-
G Risk of injury able vehicle seat. This is necessary
Do not leave children unsupervised in the because the seat belts are not designed for
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child children of this size.
restraint system. Children could injure them- Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also or under twelve years of age on the front-
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro- passenger seat. Exception: the vehicle is
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold. equipped with automatic child seat recog-
Do not expose the child restraint system to nition on the front-passenger seat* and the
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys- child is secured in a child restraint system
tem could heat up and the child could burn with automatic child seat recognition.
herself/himself on them. Rif you secure a forward-facing child
If a child opens a door, the child or other per- restraint system to the front-passenger
sons could be injured as a result. The child seat, you must move the front-passenger
could get out and be injured in the process or seat as far back as possible.
be injured by a passing vehicle.
Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap
of another occupant. Due to the forces
occurring in the event of a sudden change
of direction, heavy braking or an accident,
it would not be possible to restrain the
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 42

42 Occupant safety
child. The child could be thrown against

parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
G Risk of injury
Safety
The child restraint system cannot perform its

protective function if is not correctly fitted to
a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
restrained in the event of a sudden change of
direction, heavy braking or an accident. This
may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
this reason, when fitting a child restraint sys- restraint system
tem, observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions and the correct use of the child G Risk of injury
restraint system. If the front-passenger front airbag is not dis-
Child restraint systems should be fitted to the abled:
rear seats. Children are generally better pro- Ra child secured in a child restraint system
tected there. on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
The entire base of the child restraint system ously and even fatally injured by the front-
must always rest on the seat cushion. Never passenger front airbag deploying. This is
place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child especially a risk if the child is in the imme-
restraint system. diate vicinity of the front-passenger front
Only use child restraint systems with their airbag when it deploys.
original covers. Only replace damaged covers Ra child must never be secured on the front-
with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. passenger seat in a rearward-facing child
For safety reasons, you should only use child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-
restraint systems which have been approved facing child restraint system on a suitable
for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. rear seat.
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
Child seat on the front-passenger seat
the rearmost position if you secure a child
in a forward-facing child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger front airbag is not disa-
bled:
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seat*.
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat*, if
there is no child restraint system with auto-
Warning on the front-passenger sun visor matic child seat recognition fitted to the
front-passenger seat.
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat* if the
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 43

Occupant safety 43
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Proceed as follows:

lamp is not lit. Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
To draw attention to this danger, a corre- system on the front-passenger seat.
sponding warning sticker on the dashboard Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
and on both sides of the sun visor on the front- on a suitable rear seat.
Safety
passenger side.
or
Information about recommended child
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint
restraint systems is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to its rear-
Automatic child seat recognition on the most position.
front-passenger seat* Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
If your vehicle does not have automatic child checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
seat recognition on the front-passenger seat,
To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-
this is indicated by a special sticker. The
ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard
tions correctly, never place objects (such as
on the front-passenger side. It is visible when
a cushion) under the child restraint system.
you open the front-passenger door.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion. An
incorrectly fitted child restraint system can-
not perform its intended protective function
in the event of an accident, and could lead to
injuries.
i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt

tensioner on the front-passenger side are
still active even when the front-passenger
front airbag is disabled.
The front-passenger seat sensor system for G Risk of injury
child restraint systems detects whether a Do not place items of electronic equipment
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with auto- on the front-passenger seat, e.g.:
matic child seat recognition has been fitted. Rlaptops, when switched on
In such cases, 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
Rmobile phones
OFF indicator lamp : lights up. The front-
passenger airbag is disabled. Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
access cards
G Risk of injury
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Signals from electronic equipment can cause
lamp does not light up when the child restraint interference in the automatic child seat rec-
system is fitted, the front-passenger front air- ognition sensor system. This could lead to a
bag has not been disabled. If the front- system malfunction. This may cause the
passenger front airbag is deployed, the child 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp
could be seriously or even fatally injured. to light up without there being a child seat
with automatic child seat recognition fitted.
This means that the front-passenger airbag
does not deploy during an accident. It is also
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 44

44 Occupant safety
possible that the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF warning lamp will not light up briefly if you
turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Suitable positioning of the child restraint system

Safety
Weight categories
Seat positions ↓ Group 0: up to Group 0+: up to Group I: 9 to 18 kg;
10 kg; 13 kg;
Front-passenger X3 X3 UF4, 5, 6
seat (front-
passenger airbag is
not disabled)
Front-passenger U5, 6, 8 U5, 6, 8 U5, 6, 8
seat (front-
passenger airbag is
disabled*7)
Rear bench seat, U6, 8 U6, 8 U6, 8
left and right
Rear centre seat, IL9 IL9 U6, 8
vehicles with and
without through-
loading facility*
3 X: seat unsuitable for children of this weight category.

4 UF: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and are
approved for use in this weight category.
5 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and adjust the belt outlet height to the lowest
position.
6 As recommended, see the following table "Recommended child restraint systems".
7 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-passenger seat: the child restraint system fitted
must belong to the category with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
warning lamp must be continuously lit.
8 U: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and are
9 IL: as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended child seat securing systems".
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 45

Occupant safety 45
Weight categories
Seat positions ↓ Group II: 15 to 25 kg; Group III: 22 to 36 kg;
Front-passenger seat (front- UF10, 11, 12 UF10, 11, 12
passenger airbag is not disa-
Safety
bled)
Front-passenger seat (front- U11, 12, 14 U11, 12, 14
passenger airbag is disa-
bled*13)
Rear bench seat, left and U12, 14 U12, 14
right
Rear centre seat, vehicles U12, 14 U12, 14
with and without through-
loading facility
"Universal" category child restraint systems

can be recognised by their orange approval
label.
Example of an approval label on the child restraint

system
10 UF: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and are
11 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and adjust the belt outlet height to the lowest
position.
12 As recommended, see the following table "Recommended child restraint systems".
13 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-passenger seat: the child restraint system fitted
must belong to the category with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
warning lamp must be continuously lit.
14 U: suitable for forward-facing child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and are
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 46

46 Occupant safety
Suitable seat positions for ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight categories
Carrycot 0: up to 0+: up to 13 kg
10 kg
Safety
Size cate- F G E E D C
gory
Equipment ISO/L1 ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3
Rear bench X15 X15 IL16 IL16 IL16 IL16
seat, left and
right
Weight category
I: 9 to 18 kg
Size category D C B B1 A
Equipment ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3
Rear bench IL17 IL17 IUF18 IUF18 IUF18
seat, left and
right
Recommended child restraint systems

Weight catego- Manufac- Type Approval Daimler Automatic
ries and ages turer number order num- child seat
ber recognition
Group 0: up to Britax- BABY E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 Yes
10 kg; Römer SAFE 00
up to approxi- PLUS
mately 9 months
Group 0+: up to Britax- BABY E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 Yes
13 kg; Römer SAFE 00
up to approxi- PLUS
mately 18
months
15 X: this position is unsuitable.

16 IL: as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended ISOFIX child seat securing systems".
17 IL: as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended ISOFIX child seat securing systems".
18 IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and
are approved for use in this weight category.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 47

Occupant safety 47
Weight catego- Manufac- Type Approval Daimler Automatic

ries and ages turer number order num- child seat
ber recognition
Group I: 9 to Britax- DUO E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 Yes
18 kg; Römer PLUS 00
Safety
between A 000 970 16 No19
approximately 8 00
months and 4
years
Group II/III: 15 Britax- KID E1 03 301148 A 000 970 12 Yes
to 36 kg; Römer 00
between A 000 970 17 No19
approximately 00
3½ and 12 years
Recommended ISOFIX child seat securing system

Weight categories
Group 0: Group 0: Group 0: Group 0+: Group 0+: Group 0+:
up to up to up to up to up to up to
10 kg; 10 kg; 10 kg; 13 kg; 13 kg; 13 kg;
Size cate- E F G C D E
gory of
the child
restraint
systems
Manufac- - - - - - Britax-
turer Römer
Type - - - - - BABY SAFE
ISOFIX
PLUS
Type - - - - - E1 04
approval 301146
number
Category - - - - - Universal
19 Forchild restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the
rearmost position.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 48

48 Occupant safety
Weight categories
Group 0: Group 0: Group 0: Group 0+: Group 0+: Group 0+:
up to up to up to up to up to up to
10 kg; 10 kg; 10 kg; 13 kg; 13 kg; 13 kg;
Safety
Daimler - - - - - B6 6 86
order 8224
number
Auto- - - - - - No
matic
child seat
recogni-
tion
Weight categories
Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to Group I: 9 to
18 kg; 18 kg; 18 kg; 18 kg; 18 kg;
Size cate- A B B1 C D
gory of the
child
restraint
systems
Manufac- - - Britax-Römer - -
turer
Type - - DUO PLUS - -
Type - - E1 03 - -
approval 301133
number E1 04
301133
Category - - Universal - -
Daimler - - A 000 970 11 - -
order num- 00
ber
Automatic - - Yes - -
child seat
recognition
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 49

Occupant safety 49
ISOFIX child seat securing system in the result in serious or even fatal injuries to the
rear compartment secured child in the event of an accident,
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for heavy braking or a sudden change in direc-
specially-designed child restraint systems on tion.
the rear seats. Securing rings for two child For this reason, have child restraint systems
Safety
restraint systems are fitted on the left and and their anchorages which have been dam-
right rear seats. aged or subjected to a load in an accident
checked immediately at a qualified specialist
G Risk of injury workshop.
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
child seat securing system does not provide ! When fitting the child restraint system,
sufficient protection for children weighing make sure that the seat belt for the middle
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not seat does not become trapped. Otherwise,
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in it could be damaged.
a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
child seat securing system. If the child weighs
more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
system using a lap-shoulder belt.
G Risk of injury
The child restraint system cannot perform its
protective function if is not correctly fitted to
a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
restrained in the event of a sudden change of
direction, heavy braking or an accident. This
may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For
this reason, when fitting a child restraint sys- : Securing rings
tem, observe the manufacturer's installation TopTether
instructions and the correct use of the child
restraint system. TopTether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
On the rear seats, only use child restraint sys-
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce
tems with an ISOFIX child seat securing sys-
the risk of injury even further.
tem which have been recommended for use
in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The TopTether anchorages are located on the
rear side of the backrests.
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
When fitting the child restraint system, make
sure that it is engaged in the securing rings
on both sides.
G Risk of injury
Please note that child restraint systems can-
not provide a protective function if they or
their retaining systems are damaged or sub-
jected to a load in an accident. This could
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 50

50 Occupant safety

Activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors and the override switch for the rear
windows if children are travelling in the vehi-
cle. Otherwise, the children could open doors
Safety
or windows while the vehicle is in motion and

injure themselves or others.
X Move head restraint = upwards.

X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
TopTether*. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions.
X Guide TopTether belt*B under head
restraint = between the two head restraint
rods.
X Guide TopTether belt* B downwards
X To activate: press child-proof lock lever
between luggage compartment cover : upwards :.
and backrest ;.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
X Hook TopTether hook* A into TopTether working properly.
anchorage ?.
X To deactivate: press child-proof lock lever
X Tighten TopTether belt* B. Comply with downwards ;.
the manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions. Override feature for the rear side win-
X Move head restraint = back down again dows
slightly if necessary (Y page 64). Make G Risk of accident and injury
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- Activate the override switch for the windows
rect routing of TopTether belt* B. in the rear compartment if children are trav-
elling in the vehicle. Otherwise, the children
Child-proof locks could open the windows while the vehicle is
moving and injure themselves or others.
If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can
activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable
you to secure each door individually. A locked
door cannot be opened from the inside. The
door can be opened from the outside if the
vehicle is unlocked.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 51

Driving safety systems 51
X To activate: press button ;. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Indicator lamp : lights up. The rear side
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
windows can only be operated using the
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
switches on the driver's door.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
X To deactivate: press button ;. cle when braking.
Safety
Indicator lamp : goes out. You can oper- ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h
ate the rear side windows using the upwards, regardless of road surface condi-
switches in the rear compartment. tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently.
G Risk of accident
Driving safety systems
Do not depress the brake pedal several times
Overview of driving safety systems in quick succession (pumping). Depress the
brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake
In this section, you will find information about
pedal reduces the braking effect.
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Braking
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
RAdaptive brake lamps a pulsing in the brake pedal.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
REBV (electronic brake-power distribution) brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
uation is over.
i In wintry road conditions, always use win-
ter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, X To make a full brake application:
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- depress the brake pedal with full force.
ing safety systems described in this section
work as effectively as possible. G Risk of accident
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
G Risk of accident
braking. This limits the steerability of the vehi-
The risk of an accident is significantly
cle when braking and the braking distance
increased by driving too fast. This is particu-
may increase.
larly the case when cornering as well as on
wet or slippery roads or when driving too close If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,
to the vehicle in front. then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There
is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in
The driving safety systems described in this
certain situations.
section can neither reduce this risk nor over-
ride the laws of physics. You should always adapt your driving style to
suit prevailing road and weather conditions.
For this reason, always adapt your driving
style to suit prevailing road and weather con-
ditions. Maintain sufficient distance from Off-road ABS*(Vehicles with Off-road
other road users and objects on the road. engineering package*)
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road drive program (Y page 107) is activated.
At speeds below 30 km/h, the front wheels
lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 52

52 Driving safety systems
effect achieved in the process reduces the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

stopping distance on off-road terrain. This
limits steering capability. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between tyres and
the road surface.
BAS (Brake Assist) If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
Safety
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- from the direction desired by the driver, one
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, or more wheels are braked to stabilise the
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also
thus shortening the stopping distance. modified to keep the vehicle on the desired
course within physical limits. ESP® assists
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip-
the emergency braking situation is over.
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi-
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
cle during braking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
When ESP® intervenes, the d warning
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident
If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system
remains available with full brake boosting If the d warning lamp in the instrument
effect. However, braking force is not auto- cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
matically increased in emergency braking sit- Rdo not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
uations and the stopping distance may stances.
increase. Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
Adaptive brake lamps
ing road and weather conditions.
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid.
certain countries.
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if
If you brake sharply from a speed of more you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS, laws of physics.
the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way,
traffic travelling behind you is warned in an ! If:
even more noticeable manner.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front
If you brake sharply from a speed of more
or rear axle raised,
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn-
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the Rthe parking brake is being tested using a
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps dynamometer,
light up continuously. The hazard warning the ignition must be switched off (key in
lamps switch off automatically if you travel position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock). Other-
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off wise, application of the brakes by ESP®
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard could destroy the brake system on the front
warning switch button (Y page 76). or rear axle.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed

with the front or rear axle raised.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 53

Driving safety systems 53
i Only use wheels with the recommended heat up even further. If traction control
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function does not intervene for this reason, the
properly. d warning lamp in the instrument clus-
ter lights up. In addition the multi-function
ESP®trailer stabilisation display shows one of the following mes-
sages: ESP inoperative (vehicles with 4-
Safety
If your trailer begins to lurch, you can only button multi-function steering wheel) or
stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by ESP currently unavail. See Owner's
depressing the brake firmly. Manual (vehicles with 12-button luxury
In this situation, ESP® assists you and detects multi-function steering wheel)*.
if the trailer begins to lurch. ESP® slows the
vehicle down by braking and limiting the Activating/deactivating ESP®
engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
bination has stabilised. ESP® is activated automatically when the
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of engine is running.
about 65 km/h. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
lowing situations:
G Risk of accident
Rwhen using snow chains
If road and weather conditions are bad, trailer
stabilisation will not be able to prevent the Rin deep snow
trailer from swerving and thereby reduce the Ron sand or gravel
risk of accident. Trailers with a high centre of
gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect G Risk of accident
this. Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
function.
to spin.
ETS (Electronic Traction Support) If you deactivate ESP®:
Traction control is part of ESP®. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull the drive wheels can spin. Spinning of the
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for wheels results in a cutting action, which
example, if the road surface is slippery on one provides better grip.
side.
Rtraction control is still activated.
Traction control remains active when you
RESP® still provides support when you
deactivate ESP®.
brake.
G Risk of accident
Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more
accident if you drive too fast. Traction control wheels start to spin, the d warning lamp
cannot override the laws of physics. in the instrument cluster flashes. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehi-
i If heavy demands are made on the brakes, cle.
traction control switches off automatically
for a brief period so that the brakes do not
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 54

54 Anti-theft systems
G Risk of accident
If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system is
still available with full brake boosting effect.
However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g.
under full braking. This could cause you to
Safety
lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent. You should therefore adapt your driving
style to the different handling characteristics.
Anti-theft systems
X To deactivate: press button :.
The d warning lamp in the instrument Immobiliser
cluster light up. The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct key.
G Risk of accident
X To activate: remove the key from the igni-
If the d warning lamp in the instrument
cluster is continuously lit when the engine is tion lock.
running, ESP® is deactivated or not available X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2
due to a malfunction. There is an increased in the ignition lock.
risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situa-
tions.
You should always adapt your driving style to ATA* (anti-theft alarm system)
suit prevailing road and weather conditions.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered when
X To activate: press button :. the alarm system is primed and you open:
The d warning lamp in the instrument Ra door
cluster goes out. Ra door using the emergency key element
Rthe tailgate
Off-road ESP®*(Vehicles with off-road
Rthe bonnet
engineering package*)
The alarm is not switched off even if you close
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road a door again.
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road drive program (Y page 107) is activated.
It intervenes with a delay if there is oversteer-
ing or understeering, thus improving traction.
EBV (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)
EBV monitors and controls the brake pres-
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability during braking.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 55

Anti-theft systems 55
X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key.

Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
tem is primed after approximately 15 sec-
onds.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the
Safety
key.
Deactivating the alarm

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is deactivated.
or X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Press the % or & button on the key. X Press button :.
The alarm is deactivated. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.
X Lock the vehicle using the key.
Tow-away protection remains deactivated
Tow-away protection* until:
Rthe vehicle is unlocked again
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if the
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while Ra door is opened and closed again
tow-away protection is primed. For example, Rthe vehicle is locked again
this occurs if the vehicle is jacked up on one
side.
Priming tow-away protection Interior motion sensor*

X Lock the vehicle using the key. If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis-
Tow-away protection is primed after ual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
approximately 30 seconds. ment is detected in the vehicle interior while
the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for exam-
ple, if someone breaks the side windows of
Deactivating tow-away protection your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's inte-
Tow-away protection is automatically deacti- rior.
vated when you unlock your vehicle using the
key. Priming the interior motion sensor
Deactivate tow-away protection manually to X Make sure that:
prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: Rthe side windows are closed
Ris being transported Rthe panorama sliding sunroof* is closed
Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
transporter
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. split- handles on the roof trim.
level garages This will prevent false alarms.
The interior motion sensor is primed after
approximately 30 seconds.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 56

56 Anti-theft systems
Deactivating the interior motion sensor

The interior motion sensor is automatically
deactivated when you unlock your vehicle
using the key.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
Safety
rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle

and:
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
Rthe side windows remain open.
Rthe panorama sliding sunroof* remains
opened.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.
The interior motion sensor remains deacti-
vated until:
Rthe vehicle is unlocked again
Ra door is opened and closed again

Rthe vehicle is locked again
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 57

57
Opening and closing ........................... 58

Tailgate ................................................ 59
Key positions ....................................... 61
Seats .................................................... 62
Steering wheel .................................... 66
Mirrors ................................................. 67
Controls
Memory functions* ............................. 69
Seat belts ............................................. 70
Lights ................................................... 74
Windscreen wipers ............................. 79
Side windows ...................................... 80
Driving and parking ............................ 83
Transmission ....................................... 85
Instrument cluster .............................. 90
On-board computer (4-button
multi-function steering wheel) .......... 91
On-board computer (12-button
multi-function steering wheel*) ........ 93
Off-road driving ................................. 105
Driving systems ................................ 108
Air conditioning ................................. 117
Sliding sunroof .................................. 127
Loading and stowing ........................ 129
Features ............................................. 137
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 58

58 Opening and closing
Opening and closing If you do not open either a door or the tailgate
after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will
Key automatically relock after approximately 40
The key centrally lock/unlocks: seconds.
Rthe doors
Individual settings
Rthe tailgate
You can change the setting of the locking
Rthe fuel filler flap system in such a way that only the driver's
Controls
door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This

G Risk of accident
could be useful if you frequently travel on your
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, own.
they could:
X To change the setting: press the %
Ropen a door from the inside at any time,
and & buttons simultaneously for
even if it has been locked
approximately six seconds until the battery
Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
check lamp flashes twice.
left in the vehicle
The key now functions as follows:
Rrelease the parking brake
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
They could, thereby, endanger themselves % button once.
and others. Never leave children unsuper-
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
vised in the vehicle. Always take the key with
you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are ton twice.
only leaving it for a short time. X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Restoring the factory settings

X Press the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice.
Additional information
RConvenience closing (Y page 82)
RConvenience opening (Y page 82)
ROpening and closing in an emergency
: Battery check lamp
(Y page 213)
; & To lock the vehicle
; F To unlock the tailgate
? % To unlock the vehicle Opening the doors from the inside
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. You can open a door from the inside even if it
When locking, they flash three times. has been locked, unless the child-proof locks
When it is dark, the surround lighting also have been activated (Y page 50).
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 59

Tailgate 59
Controls
X Pull door handle ;. X To unlock: press button :.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops X To lock: press button ;.
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.
Automatic locking
The vehicle will lock automatically once you
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from have pulled away.
the inside On vehicles with a luxury multi-function steer-
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle ing wheel* you can also activate and deacti-
from the inside. This feature may be useful if, vate the automatic locking using the on-board
for example, you wish to unlock the front- computer (Y page 104).
passenger door from the inside or lock the i The vehicle is locked automatically when
vehicle before you pull away. the ignition is switched on and the wheels
begin to turn. There is a risk of being locked
G Risk of accident
out when the vehicle is being pushed or
Do not leave children unsupervised in the tested on a dynamometer.
vehicle. They could open a door from the
inside – even if it is locked – and thereby X To switch off: press button : until you
endanger themselves and others. hear a tone.
X To switch on: press button ; until you
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally hear a tone.
from the inside if the vehicle has been
locked with the key.
Tailgate
i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen-
trally if the front-passenger door is closed. Points to remember
G Risk of poisoning
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior
if the engine is running and the tailgate is
open. This could poison you. Therefore, you
should make sure that the tailgate is always
closed when the engine is running.
! The tailgate swings up and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 60

60 Tailgate
there is sufficient clearance above and X To close: pull down the boot lid using
behind the tailgate. recess :.
Do not leave the key in the luggage compart- X Lock the vehicle, if necessary, with
ment. Otherwise, you could lock yourself out. the & button on the key.
The tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually
(Y page 60) Opening/closing* automatically from
the outside
Controls
Ropened and closed* automatically from

outside (Y page 60) You can open the tailgate automatically using
Ropened
the key or the handle in the tailgate.
and closed* automatically from
inside (Y page 61) G Risk of injury
Monitor the boot lid opening and closing pro-
cedures to make sure that nobody can
Opening and closing manually become trapped. To halt the opening or clos-
X To open: press the F button on the key. ing procedure, press the closing button* on
the tailgate again or pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate.
X To unlock and open: press and hold but-

ton F on the key until the tailgate
opens.
or
X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the han-
dle and let it go again immediately.
You can automatically close the tailgate with
the key or with the closing button.
X Pull handle :.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you close the tailgate.
X To close: press closing button : on the

tailgate or press and hold down the F
button until the tailgate closes.
i The tailgate can only be opened and
closed with the key if there is no key in the
ignition lock.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 61

Key positions 61
If the tailgate touches an object while clos- ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
ing, the closing procedure is interrupted open the tailgate fully when setting the
and the tailgate reopens. opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.
Opening/closing* automatically from
the inside Activating
you can open/close the tailgate from the To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
Controls
X
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure: press the
G Risk of injury
Monitor the tailgate opening and closing pro- closing button (Y page 60) in the tailgate or
cedures to make sure that nobody can pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate
become trapped. To halt the opening or clos- once the tailgate has reached the desired
ing procedure, press or pull the tailgate's position.
remote operating button from the driver's X Press and hold the closing button in the
seat again. tailgate until you hear a tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
i If you wish to open the tailgate com-
pletely, pull the handle of the tailgate again
after it has stopped automatically. This
does not delete the stored position.
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button
(Y page 60) in the tailgate until you hear
X To open: press the upper section of remote two short tones.
operating button : until the tailgate
opens.
X To close: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in Key positions
the ignition lock. Key
X Press the lower section of remote operat-
ing button : until the tailgate closes.
Limiting the tailgate opening angle*

You can limit the opening angle of the tail-
gate. This is possible in the top half of its
opening range, up to approximately 20 cm
before the stop.
Limiting the opening angle can be useful if
there is not sufficient clearance above the
open tailgate, for example.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 62

62 Seats
g To remove the key G Risk of injury

1 Power supply for some consumers, such Make sure that the central area of the head
as the windscreen wipers restraint supports the back of your head at
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) about eye level. You could seriously injure
and drive position your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
3 To start the engine ported by the head restraint in the event of an
accident. Never travel without a correctly
i Even if the key is not for the vehicle in adjusted and engaged head restraint.
Controls
question, it will still turn in the ignition lock.

The ignition is not switched on. The engine ! When you move the seats, make sure that
cannot be started. there are no objects in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could
damage the seats and the objects.
Seats
i The head restraints in the front seats are
Points to remember
fitted with the NECK-PRO system
For information about folding the rear bench (Y page 40). For this reason, it is not pos-
seat forwards, see the "Luggage compart- sible to remove the head restraints from
ment enlargement" section (Y page 132). the front seats.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the The rear-compartment head restraints can
seats can adjusted either manually/electri- be removed (Y page 64).
cally or electrically*. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
G Risk of injury Centre for more information.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason,
Adjusting the seats manually and
children should never be left unsupervised in
electrically
the vehicle. They could become trapped when
adjusting a seat.
G Risk of accident
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
from the road and traffic conditions and you
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of
the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
dent.
G Risk of injury
when you adjust the seat.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Observe the notes concerning the airbag sys- X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
tem. or backwards.
Secure children as recommended; see "Chil- X Release handle ? again.
dren in the vehicle" section. Make sure that you hear the seat engage
into position.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 63

Seats 63
Backrest angle Head restraint angle

X Slide the button forwards or back in the
direction of arrow :.
Seat height
X Slide the button up or down in the direction
of arrow ;.
Controls
Seat cushion angle
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently
supported.
X Push or pull the head restraint in the direc-
X Turn thumbwheel = in the desired direction of the arrow.
tion.
Head restraint height Adjusting the seat electrically*
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the i If PRE-SAFE®* is triggered in vehicles with
desired position. the memory function*, the front-passenger
X To lower: press release catch : in the seat will be moved to a better position if it
direction of the arrow and push the head was previously in an unfavourable position.
restraint down to the desired position.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
direction of arrow ?.
Backrest angle
direction of arrow A.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 64

64 Seats
Seat height X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired height.
of arrow =. X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
Seat cushion angle desired position.
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently Adjusting the angle of the outer head
supported.
Controls
restraints
of arrow ;. X Pull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.
Head restraint height
Fitting/removing the rear seat head
X Slide the button up or down in the direction restraints
of arrow :.
G Risk of injury
Head restraint angle Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
which have the head restraints installed. This
reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in
the rear in the event of an accident.
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head

restraint in the direction of the arrow.
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to

Rear seat head restraints the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
Adjusting the head restraint height
restraint out of the guides.
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it click into place.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 65

Seats 65
Lumbar support cally checked and if necessary the individ-

ual setting is restored.
The lumbar support for the driver's seat can
be adjusted to provide optimum support for
your back. Seat heating*
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
Controls
X Move adjustment lever : in the direction
of the arrow until the desired backrest con-
tour is achieved.
i The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
4-way lumbar support* five minutes.
The system automatically switches down
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately
backrests individually to provide optimum
ten minutes.
support for your back.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
: To raise the backrest contour
heating may switch off.
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
i When the door is unlocked, opened or the

key is in position 1 in the ignition lock, the
setting of the lumbar support is automati-
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 66

66 Steering wheel
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel man-

ually
Points to remember
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
adjust the steering wheel either manually or
electrically*.
G Risk of injury
Controls
The electrically adjustable steering wheel*

can be adjusted when the key is removed
from the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle as they
could become trapped as the steering wheel
is adjusted. : Release lever
; Height adjustment
G Risk of accident
= Fore-and-aft adjustment
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the X Push release catch : down completely.
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is The steering column is unlocked.
locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position and be distrac-
position.
ted from road and traffic conditions by an X Push release lever : up completely.
unexpected movement of the steering wheel The steering wheel is locked in position.
and cause an accident.
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
affected. Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally*
When you adjust the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Rthe steering wheel can be reached with
your arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
: Height adjustment
; Fore-and-aft adjustment
You can find more information under:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 67)
Rstoring settings (Y page 69)
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 67

Mirrors 67
Easy-entry/exit feature* Mirrors

The easy-entry/exit feature makes getting in Rear-view mirror
and out of your vehicle easier.
X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you
The steering wheel swings upwards when have a good overview of the traffic condi-
you: tions.
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door when the key in the Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle)
Controls
ignition lock is in position 0 or 1.
When the key is inserted into the ignition lock
with the driver's door closed, the steering
wheel is automatically moved to the previ-
ously set position.
G Risk of injury
when you activate the easy-entry/exit fea-
ture.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop the
adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure:
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
Rpress the steering-column adjustment
switch : forwards or back.
switch
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons Exterior mirrors
The steering column stops moving immedi-
ately. G Risk of accident
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
image. Objects are actually closer than they
cle. They could open the driver's door and
appear. You could misjudge the distance from
thereby unintentionally activate the easy-
vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
entry feature and become trapped.
dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
The most recent position of the steering son, make sure of the actual distance from the
wheel is stored when you switch off the igni- vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
tion or when you store a memory position shoulder.
(Y page 69).
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
You can activate and deactivate the easy- field of vision.
entry/exit feature via the on-board computer
At low outside temperatures, the exterior mir-
(Y page 104).
rors are heated automatically.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 68

68 Mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate.
Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or has
become discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold in
Controls
when you select the "Fold in mirrors when

locking" function in the on-board computer
(Y page 104).
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or the ignition lock.
2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
rior mirror.
automatically*
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
The indicator lamp goes out again after is activated in the on-board computer
some time. You can adjust the selected (Y page 104):
mirror using adjustment button = as long Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
as the indicator lamp is lit. soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
X Press adjustment button = up, down, to side.
the right or to the left until the exterior mir- Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ror is set to a position which provides you ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
with a good overview of traffic conditions. then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i If you have activated this function and fold
electrically* in the exterior mirrors using button :, they
will not be folded out automatically. You
can only fold out the exterior mirrors again
using button :.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if
2 in the ignition lock.
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
X Briefly press button :.
is switched on.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 69

Memory functions* 69
G Risk of accident
If incident light from headlamps is prevented
from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir-
ror, for instance, if the safety net is fitted, the
mirror’s automatic anti-dazzle function will
not work.
Incident light could then dazzle you. This may
distract you from the traffic conditions, and
Controls
you may, thereby, cause an accident. In this
case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 62).
Memory functions* X On the driver's side, also adjust the steer-
ing wheel (Y page 66) and the mirrors
Storing settings (Y page 67).
X Press memory button M and press storage
You can store up to three different settings
using the memory button. position switch 1, 2 or 3 within three sec-
onds.
The following settings are stored as a single
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
memory preset:
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
tings have been completed.
restraint
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- Calling up a stored setting
rors on the driver's and front-passenger X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
sides tion button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
G Risk of injury
position.
The memory function can still be used when
the key has been removed. For this reason, i The setting procedure is interrupted as
children should never be left unsupervised in soon as you release the storage position
the vehicle. Otherwise, they could become switch.
trapped when moving the seat or the steering
wheel. ! If you want to move the seat from the fully
reclined position to a stored seat position,
G Risk of accident first raise the backrest using the seat
Only use the memory function on the driver’s switch. Otherwise, the seat could be dam-
side when the vehicle is stationary. Other- aged.
wise, you could be distracted from the traffic
conditions by the steering wheel and seat
moving of their own accord, and as a result Passenger side exterior mirror park-
cause an accident. ing position*
To make it easier to park, you can set and
store the front-passenger side exterior mirror
position in such a way that you can see the
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 70

70 Seat belts
rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
reverse gear. the steps.
Setting and storing the parking position Calling up the parking position
X When the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side is activated, engage
reverse gear.
Controls
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
10 km/h
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
gaged reverse gear
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock. Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on ror on the driver's side
the front-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger Seat belts
side moves to the preset parking position. Wearing seat belts
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
Seat belts are the most effective means of
exterior mirror to a position which allows
restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
you to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
pants in the event of an accident. This
The parking position is stored.
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
i If you shift the automatic transmission into contact with the vehicle interior.
into another gear, the exterior mirror on the G Risk of injury
front-passenger side returns to the driving
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
position.
which has not been engaged in the seat belt
i You can also store the parking position buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended
using the memory button M ?: protective function. Under certain circum-
stances, this could result in severe or even
X With the key in position 2 in the igni- fatal injuries.
tion lock and with the exterior mirror
Make sure that all occupants – in particular,
on the front-passenger side activated,
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-
use adjustment button = to set the
rectly at all times.
exterior mirror such that the rear
RThe seat belt must pass closely over your
wheel and kerb are visible.
body and must not be twisted. Therefore,
X Press memory button M ? and one of
you should avoid wearing bulky clothing
the arrows on adjustment button = (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt sec-
within three seconds. tion must be routed across the middle of
The parking position is stored if the your shoulder – on no account across your
exterior mirror does not move.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 71

Seat belts 71
neck or under your arm – and pulled tight Before starting a journey, make sure that the
against your upper body. The lap belt must seat is properly adjusted and that the back-
always pass across your lap as low down as rest is almost vertical.
possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not
across your abdomen. If necessary, push G Risk of injury
down the belt strap slightly and then A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that
retighten it in the roll-up direction. has been subjected to a load in an accident
RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or or modified no longer offers the intended level
Controls
fragile objects, especially if these are loca- of protection. Under certain circumstances,
ted on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries.
pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could For this reason, check regularly that the seat
be damaged and tear in an accident, and belts are not damaged or dirty.
you or other vehicle occupants could be Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
injured. that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
ROnly one person should use each seat belt dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
at any one time. Children must never travel shop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop
sitting on the lap of other occupants. It which has the necessary specialist knowledge
would not be possible to restrain the child and tools to carry out the work required.
in the event of a sudden change in direc- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
tion, braking or an accident. This could Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
result in severe or even fatal injuries to the pose.
child and other occupants. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat belts which have
RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
the seat belts correctly. For this reason,
vehicle.
secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in spe-
cially designed, suitable restraint systems.
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under
12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts
properly. Therefore, they always should be
secured in a suitable child restraint system
on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find
more information under "Children in the
vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Own-
er's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when fitting the
child restraint system.
RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt
if the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants.
G Risk of injury
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection unless the backrest is almost
vertical. Under certain circumstances, this
could cause severe or even fatal injuries.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 72

72 Seat belts
Fastening the belt For certain countries only: regardless of

whether the driver or the front passenger
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
already have their seat belt fastened, the
an almost vertical position (Y page 62).
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash
seconds after the engine has been started. It
guide :. then goes out if both the driver and the front
X Route the belt over the centre of the shoul- passenger have fastened their seat belt.
der without twisting it.
i Further information about the 7 seat
Controls
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.

belt warning lamp .
X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appro-
priate height (Y page 72).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder Belt height adjustment
section of the belt to tighten the belt across
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
your body.
driver's seat and front-passenger seat.
Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be
Wearing the rear centre seat belt routed across the middle of your shoulder.
If the right-hand rear seat backrest is folded
down and back up again, the rear centre seat
belt may lock. Then, the seat belt cannot be
pulled out.
X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull
out the seat belt at the belt outlet on the
rear seat backrest approximately 20 mm
and release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Unfastening the belt

X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
X Press release button ? and guide belt The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tongue ; back towards belt sash tions.
guide :. X To lower: press and hold release but-
ton :.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
Belt warning for driver and front
X Release release button : and make sure
passenger
that the belt sash guide has engaged.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster reminds you that all occupants
should fasten their seat belts. It is either lit Rear seat belt status indicator
continuously or flashes. Additionally, there
may be a warning tone. The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and cator tells you if any of the rear passengers
the warning tone ceases as soon as the driver do not have their seat belt fastened. The sta-
and front passenger have fastened their seat tus indicator also tells you how many of the
belts. belt tongues are inserted into the seat belt
buckles.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 73

Seat belts 73
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- Correct driver's seat position
cator appears in the multi-function display for
around 30 seconds if:
Ryou set off and have reached a speed of
approximately 10 km/h.
Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten
their seat belts while driving.
Controls
Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle.
You can also cancel the messages immedi-
ately (Y page 176).
The following messages appear in the multi-
function display:
Vehicles with multi-function steering wheel (4
buttons)
R7 No rr.st.belt engaged
R7 1 rr.st.belt engaged
R7 2 rr.st.belts engaged
R7 3 rr.st.belts engaged G Risk of accident
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
wheel* (12 buttons) is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
from the road and traffic conditions and you
R7 No rear seat belt engaged could lose control of the vehicle as a result of
R7 1 rear seat belt engaged the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
dent.
R7 2 rear seat belts engaged
R7 3 rear seat belts engaged G Risk of accident
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
i The status indicator for the rear-compart- cle is stationary and do not pull away until the
ment seat belts is only available for certain steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
countries. locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position and be distrac-
ted from road and traffic conditions by an
unexpected movement of the steering wheel
and cause an accident.
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
affected.
X Check whether seat = and the head

restraint are adjusted properly
(Y page 62).
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 74

74 Lights
Make sure that: these countries, daytime driving lights are

Ryou are as far away from the driver's front automatically switched on when the engine is
airbag as possible. started.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- i If you drive in countries in which traffic
tion. drives on the opposite side of the road to
the country where the vehicle is registered,
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the
Ryou have moved the backrest to an asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps.
Controls
almost vertical position. Have the headlamps changed to symmet-

Ryou have set the seat angle so that your rical dipped beam when driving in these
thighs are gently supported. countries. You can obtain information
about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Ryou can depress the pedals properly. Centre.
Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so
that the back of your head is supported
at eye level by the central area of the
head restraint.
X Check whether steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly (Y page 66).
Make sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- 1 W Left-hand parking lamp
ment cluster clearly. 2 X Right-hand parking lamp
X Check whether you have fastened seat 3 $ Lights off/daytime driving lights
belt ; properly (Y page 70). 4 c Automatic headlamp mode/day-
It should: time driving lights
5 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
Rfit snugly across your body.
ment lighting
Rbe routed across the middle of your 6 L Dipped-beam headlamps or main-
shoulder. beam headlamps
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the 7 N Foglamps
hip joints. 8 R Rear foglamp
i The exterior lighting (except for side

Lights lamps and parking lamps) automatically
switches off when you remove the key from
Light switch the ignition lock or open the driver's door
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- while the ignition is switched off (ignition
mends that you drive with the lights switched key in position 0).
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, daytime operation of headlamps varies
due to legal and voluntary requirements. In
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 75

Lights 75
! Switch off the side lamps and parking cally depending on the brightness of the
lamp when you leave the vehicle. This pre- ambient light.
vents the battery from discharging. Engine start: depending on the ambient
light conditions, the side lamp and the
Dipped-beam headlamps dipped-beam headlamps are switched on
or off automatically.
X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine. When the dipped-beam headlamps are
switched on, the indicator lamp next to the
Controls
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
light switch and the L indicator lamp in
L.
the instrument cluster light up.
The side lamp indicator lamp next to the
light switch and the L indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster light up. Foglamps
G Risk of accident
Daytime driving lights If you suspect that driving conditions will be
On vehicles with a luxury multi-function steer- foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
ing wheel*, you can activate or deactivate the start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
daytime driving light function using the on- may not be visible and you could endanger
board computer (Y page 102). yourself and others.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
$ or c. lock.
Engine start: the dipped-beam headlamps
are switched on.
L or T. If the light switch is set to
c, you cannot switch on the foglamp.
Automatic headlamp mode
X Pull the light switch out to the first detent.
G Risk of accident The N green indicator lamp next to the
If the light switch is set to the c position, light switch lights up.
the light will not come on automatically in X To switch off: press the light switch in as
foggy conditions. This could endanger you far as it will go.
and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to The N green indicator lamp next to the
L in the dark or in fog. light switch goes out.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's Rear foglamp
lighting at all times.
G Risk of accident lock.
When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch
from c to L in good time. Otherwise, L or T. When the light switch is set
the headlamps could switch off temporarily to c you cannot switch on the rear fog-
and you could cause an accident. lamp.

c.
Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
side lamp is switched on or off automati-
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 76

76 Lights
X Pull the light switch out to the second stop. X To switch on: press the combination
Yellow indicator lamp R next to the light switch in the direction of arrow :.
switch lights up. The K indicator lamp in the instrument
X To switch off: press the light switch in as cluster lights up.
far as it will go. X To deactivate: move the combination
The R yellow indicator lamp next to the switch back to its normal position.
light switch goes out. The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Controls
Combination switch (turn signals, Headlamp flasher

main-beam headlamps and headlamp
flasher) X To switch on: briefly pull the combination
switch in the direction of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
Turn signal lamp

X To switch on: press the combination
switch in the direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal indicator The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
lamp ! or # in the instrument clus- ignition is switched off. They switch on auto-
matically if an airbag is deployed or if you
ter flashes.
brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a halt
i If you only wish to indicate a minor change from a speed of more than 70 km/h.
of direction, press the combination switch X To switch on: press button :.
briefly in the appropriate direction. The cor- All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
responding turn signal flashes three times. a turn signal using the combination switch
(Y page 76), only the turn signal lamp on
Main-beam headlamps the corresponding side of the vehicle will
X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the flash.
ignition lock or start the engine. X To switch off: press button :.
X Turn the light switch to L or c20.
20 in the c position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 77

Lights 77
Adjusting the headlamp range (halo- Intelligent Light System* (bi-xenon

gen headlamps) headlamps*)
The headlamp range control allows you to The Intelligent Light System is a system which
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit
to suit the vehicle load. the prevailing driving and weather conditions.
The bi-xenon headlamps offer advanced func-
tions to improve illumination of the road sur-
face, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or
Controls
weather conditions. The system includes the
active light system, cornering light function,
motorway mode and extended range fog-
lamps. The system is only active when it is
dark.
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering
wheel*: you can activate or deactivate the
"Intelligent Light System" using the on-board
X Start the engine. computer (Y page 102).
X Turn headlamp range control : to the
position which corresponds to the load in Active light system
your vehicle.
0 Driver's seat and front-passenger seat
occupied
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
rear seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment laden
2 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu-
pied and maximum permissible rear axle
load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer
3 Not required
The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the steer-
Headlamp cleaning system* ing movements of the front wheels. In this
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid" func- driving. This allows you to recognise pedes-
tion is operated while the lights are on and trians, cyclists and animals.
the engine is running. The headlamps are
cleaned again every tenth time the wind-
screen is wiped with washer fluid. When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic head-
lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is
resumed from 0.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 78

78 Lights
Cornering light Motorway mode

Controls
The cornering light function improves the illu- Motorway mode increases the range of the
mination of the road surface in the broad beam.
direction you are turning, e.g. making it easier Active:
to see in tight corners. It can only be activated RIf you are driving at speeds above
when the dipped-beam headlamps are
110 km/h and do not make any large steer-
switched on.
ing movements for 1,000 m.
Active:
RIfyou are driving at speeds above
Rif you are driving at speeds below 130 km/h.
40 km/h, the cornering light function is
activated either by the turn signal or by the Motorway mode remains active unless your
steering wheel being turned. speed drops speeds below 80 km/h.
Rif
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
you are driving at speeds between
80 km/h.
40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light
function is activated by the steering wheel
being turned. Extended range foglamps
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
70 km/h or you switch off the turn signal or
move the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
The extended range foglamps reduce the

glare experienced by the driver and improve
the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
way.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp.
If your speed does not exceed 100 km/h, the
extended foglamp function remains active.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 79

Windscreen wipers 79
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above Automatic interior lighting control
100 km/h or you switch off the rear foglamp.
X To switch on/off: press the | button.
The | button pops up or goes down.
Interior lighting The interior lighting switches on automati-
cally in darkness, when you unlock the vehi-
cle, open a door or remove the key from the
ignition lock.
Controls
The interior lighting switches off after a delay.
You can set the delayed switch-off using the
on-board computer (Y page 103). If the door
is left open, the interior lighting goes out after
approximately five minutes.
Emergency accident lighting

If the interior lighting is set to automatic, the
Front overhead control panel interior lighting is activated automatically if
: u Switches the rear interior lighting the vehicle is involved in an accident.
on/off
X To switch off: press the hazard warning
; | Switches the automatic interior
lamp button (Y page 76).
lighting control on/off
or
= p Switches the right-hand reading
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
lamp on/off
key.
? c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
A p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
Windscreen wipers
on/off
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: p Switches the right-hand reading
Combination switch
lamp* on/off
1 $ Windscreen wipers off
; p Switches the left-hand reading
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low21
lamp* on/off
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high22
21 Rain sensor* set to low sensitivity.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 80

80 Side windows
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 4 To switch off intermittent wiping

5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 5 To wipe with washer fluid
B Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
washer fluid
lock.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor*: X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry sponding position.

weather conditions, the windscreen wipers When the rear window wiper is switched on
Controls
may be activated inadvertently. This could the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
then damage the windscreen wiper blades
or scratch the windscreen.
For this reason, you should always switch Side windows
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Opening and closing the side win-
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition dows
lock. G Risk of injury
X Turn the combination switch to the corre- Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sponding position. between the side window and the door frame
Vehicles with a rain sensor*: in the Ä when a side window is opened. Do not touch
or Å position, the appropriate wiping fre- or lean against the side window during the
quency is automatically set according to the opening procedure. You could become trap-
intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the ped between the side window and the door
rain sensor is more sensitive than in the frame as the side window moves down. If
Ä position and therefore the windscreen there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
wiper will wipe more frequently. the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
the side window again.
Rear window wiper G Risk of injury

when closing the side windows. If there is a
risk of becoming trapped, release the switch
or push the switch again to reopen the side
window.
G Risk of injury
Children may injure themselves if they oper-
ate the side windows.
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
Combination switch the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
: Switch a short time.
2 To wipe with washer fluid
3 To switch on intermittent wiping
22 Rain sensor* set to high sensitivity.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 81

Side windows 81
G Risk of injury The switches for all side windows are located
Do not leave children unsupervised in the on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child each door for the corresponding side window.
restraint system. The children could:
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts
of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
Controls
longed exposure to extremely high or
extremely low temperatures
If children open a door, they could:
Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring

themselves or be seriously or even fatally : Front left
injured by a passing vehicle ; Front right
Activate the child-proof locks/override fea- = Rear right
ture if children are travelling in the vehicle. ? Rear left
They could otherwise open doors or side win-
dows while the vehicle is in motion and
thereby injure themselves or others. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
i Related topics: i You can continue to operate the side win-
Rconvenience opening from the outside dows when you switch off the engine. This
(Y page 82) or from the inside function remains active for five minutes or
(Y page 126) until one of the front doors is opened.
Rconvenience closing from the outside X To open: press the corresponding switch.
(Y page 82) or from the inside X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
(Y page 126)
i If you press the switch beyond the point
Rdisabling the controls in the rear com-
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
partment (override feature) (Y page 50)
ing process is started in the corresponding
Rautomatic closing of the side windows direction. You can stop automatic opera-
(PRE-SAFE®*) (Y page 40) tion by pressing again.
Closing with increased force and with-

out the anti-entrapment feature
G Risk of injury
Closing the side windows with increased force
or without the anti-entrapment feature could
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure
that nobody can become trapped when clos-
ing the side windows.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 82

82 Side windows
If a side window blocks during closing and If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding
reopens slightly: sunroof* are closed, the roller sunblinds are
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull opened first.
on the corresponding switch again until the X Press and hold the % button again until
side window has closed. the panorama sliding sunroof* is in the
The side window is closed with increased desired position.
force.
Controls
If a side window blocks again during closing

and reopens slightly: Convenience closing
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
on the corresponding switch again until the neously:
side window has closed. Rclose the side windows
The side window is closed without the anti-
Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof*
entrapment feature.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sun-
roof*, you can then close the roller sunblinds.
Convenience opening
G Risk of injury
You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. When using the convenience closing feature,
To do this, you can use the key to simultane- make sure that nobody can become trapped.
ously: Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-
Ropen the side windows ment:
Ropen Rrelease the & button.
the panorama sunroof and roller sun-
blinds* Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama sliding
i The "Convenience opening" feature can
sunroof open again.
only be operated using the key.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle. handle.
X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the %
X Lock the vehicle with the & button.
button.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama sunroof*
are in the desired position.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 83

Driving and parking 83
X Press and hold the & button until the Automatic transmission
side windows and the panorama sliding
sunroof* are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama sliding sunroof* are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sun-
roof*:
Controls
X Press and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds* of the panorama slid-
ing sunroof* close.
X Before starting, make sure P is selected.

Driving and parking
i The engine can also be started when the
Starting the engine selector lever is in position N.
G Risk of accident
Starting the engine
Do not put any objects in the driver's footwell.
If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
footwell, make sure that they are correctly position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 61)
secured and that there is sufficient clearance and release it as soon as the engine is run-
for the pedals. ning.
Do not place several floormats on top of one X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
another. position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 61).
Otherwise, the objects or floormats could get The % preglow indicator lamp in the
between the pedals in the event of sudden instrument cluster lights up.
braking or acceleration. You may then no lon- X When the % preglow indicator lamp
ger be able to brake, change gear or acceler- goes out, turn the key to position 3 and
ate as intended. This may result in an accident release it as soon as the engine is running.
and injury.
i You can start the engine without preglow
G Risk of poisoning if the engine is warm.
Never leave the engine running in enclosed
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti- Pulling away
tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
of consciousness or even death. the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal Only shift into reverse gear when the vehi-
when starting the engine. cle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the
drive train.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 84

84 Driving and parking
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Hill start assist does not function if:
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
drop down. downhill gradient.
You can open the doors from the inside at Rthe selector lever is in position N.
any time.
Rthe vehicle is secured with the parking
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
ing feature (Y page 104). brake.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Controls
i It is only possible to move the selector

lever to the desired position if you depress
the brake pedal. Only then is the selector Parking
lever lock released. G Risk of accident
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Only remove the key from the ignition lock
depressed. when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot
X Move the selector lever to position D or R. steer the vehicle with the key removed.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 84). Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. They could release the parking brake. This
X Release the brake pedal.
could lead to a serious or fatal accident.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine G Risk of fire

speeds after a cold start. This helps the Make sure that the exhaust system does not
catalytic converter to reach its operating under any circumstances come into contact
temperature more quickly. with easily ignitable material such as dry grass
or petrol. The material could otherwise ignite
and set the vehicle on fire.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away Parking brake
on uphill gradients. It holds the vehicle for a
short time after you have removed your foot
from the brake pedal. This gives you enough
time to move your foot from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal and depress it before
the vehicle begins to roll.
G Risk of accident
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
start assist. After approximately one second,
hill start assist will no longer brake your vehi-
cle and it could roll away.
X To apply: depress parking brake ;.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal. The J warning lamp in the instrument
i Once you have taken your foot off the cluster lights up if the engine is running.
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
one second. towards the kerb.
X Pull away.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 85

Transmission 85
X To release: depress the brake pedal and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
keep it depressed. to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
X Pull release handle :. accident.
The J warning lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
Controls
G Risk of accident
If the engine is not running, there is no power
assistance for the steering and brakes. Steer-
ing and braking will then require significantly
greater effort.
As a result, you might lose control of the vehi-
cle, cause an accident and injure yourself and
others.
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Selector lever
X Move the selector lever to P.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 61) in

the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
i The key can only be removed when the
selector lever is in position P.
Transmission : Selector lever position/shift range
Notes on the transmission ; Drive program (C/S) or (C/S/M)*

The current shift range and drive program
G Risk of accident
(C/S) or (C/S/M)* appear in the multi-func-
The movement of the pedals must not be tion display.
impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
als.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 86

86 Transmission
Selector lever positions X To shift up/down: briefly push the selec-

tor lever to the right towards D+ or to the
B Park position left towards D– (Y page 85).
Prevents the vehicle from rolling The automatic transmission shifts to the
away when stopped. Only move the next gear up/down depending on the gear
selector lever to P when the vehicle currently selected. This also restricts/
is stationary. derestricts the shift range.
i The key can only be removed i To prevent the engine from overrevving,
Controls
when the selector lever is in posi- the automatic transmission does not shift
tion P. If the key is removed from down if you push the selector lever towards
the ignition lock, the selector D– while driving at too high a speed.
lever is locked in position P.
X To derestrict the shift range: press and
C Reverse gear hold the selector lever towards D+ until D
Only move the selector lever to R is shown once more in the multi-function
when the vehicle is stationary. display.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
A Neutral current shift range directly to D.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to X To select the most effective shift
push it or tow it. range: press and hold the selector lever to
the left towards D–.
Do not move the selector lever to
The automatic transmission will shift to a
N while you are driving. Otherwise,
range which allows ideal acceleration and
the automatic transmission could
deceleration. To do this, the automatic
be damaged.
transmission will shift down one or more
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: gears.
only move the selector lever to N if
the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
Shift ranges
e.g. on icy roads.
When the selector lever is in position D, it is
7 Drive
possible to restrict or derestrict the shift
The automatic transmission range for the automatic transmission.
changes gear automatically. All
X Briefly push the selector lever to the left/
forward gears are available.
right towards D+/D–.
The shift range selected is shown in the
Touchshift in vehicles with a selector multi-function display. The automatic
lever transmission shifts only as far as the selec-
When the selector lever is in position D, you ted gear.
can influence the gearshifts made by the i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
automatic transmission by:
range is reached and you continue to accel-
Rchanging gear yourself using the selector erate, the automatic transmission shifts up
lever or the steering wheel gearshift pad- in order to prevent the engine from over-
dles* revving, even if the shift range is restricted.
Rrestricting/derestricting the shift range
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 87

Transmission 87
Driving situation: gear indicator i If automatic drive program C or S has

been selected, the automatic transmission
= The braking effect of the engine can will resume the respective drive program
be used in this position. when you restart the engine.
5 To use the braking effect of the Drive program C is characterised by the fol-
engine on downhill gradients and lowing:
for driving: Rcomfort-oriented engine and suspension
Ron steep mountain roads
Controls
settings.
Rin mountainous terrain Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Rin arduous conditions forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
4 To use the braking effect of the Rincreased sensitivity. This improves the
engine on extremely steep downhill driving stability of the vehicle on slippery
gradients and long downhill road surfaces, for example.
stretches
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner, which results in the vehicle being
i On vehicles with steering wheel gearshift driven at lower engine speeds and the
paddles*, you can restrict or derestrict the wheels being less likely to spin.
shift range in the same way as with Touch- Drive program S is characterised by the fol-
shift (Y page 86). lowing:
Rsporty engine and suspension configura-
Program selector button tion
The program selector button allows you to Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
choose between different driving character- Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
istics.
later
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
C Comfort comfortable driving style

S Sport sporty driving style
X Press program selector button : repeat-

edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
program C or S appears in the multi-func-
tion display.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 88

88 Transmission
Kickdown i When the selector lever is in position P,

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. N or R, you cannot change gear using the
steering wheel gearshift paddles.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point. Upshifting
The transmission shifts to a lower gear X Pull right-hand steering wheel gearshift
depending on the engine speed. paddle ;.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the The automatic transmission shifts up to the
Controls
desired speed is reached. next gear.

The automatic transmission shifts back up. If you are not driving in manual drive pro-
Trailer towing gram M, then the shift range will be deres-
tricted.
X When driving up gradients, keep to the mid-
dle of the engine speed range. Downshifting
X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 depending X Pull left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
on the gradient, even if cruise con- dle :.
trol*(Y page 86)is activated. The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
If you are not driving in manual drive pro-
Steering wheel gearshift paddles* gram M, then the shift range will be restric-
and manual gearshift program* ted.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine Manual drive program
braking on a slippery road surface. This could Manual drive program M can be selected
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and using the program selector button. In manual
the vehicle could skid. drive program M, you can change gear using
the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the
Steering wheel gearshift paddles selector lever.
It is possible to shift gear using either the
steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selec-
tor lever.
: Program selector button on vehicles with-

out the dynamic handling package with
sports mode*
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 89

Transmission 89
Downshifting
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
towards D-
or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 88).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Controls
i If you desire maximum acceleration, push
: Program selector button on vehicles with the selector lever to the left repeatedly or
the dynamic handling package with sports pull and hold the left-hand steering wheel
mode* gearshift paddle until the transmission
shifts to the optimal gear for the current
C Comfort comfortable driving style speed.
X To deactivate (vehicles without the
S Sport sporty driving style
dynamic handling package with sports
M Manual manual gearshifting mode*):
Press program selector button : repeat-
edly, until C or S appears in the multi-func-
i If manual drive program M has been tion display.
selected and you restart the engine, the X To deactivate (vehicles with the
automatic transmission will switch to an
dynamic handling package with sports
automatic drive program. If automatic drive
mode*):
program C or S has been selected, the
Press program selector button :.
automatic transmission will resume the
respective drive program when you restart M is no longer shown in the multi-function
the engine. display.
X To activate: press program selector but- Kickdown

ton : repeatedly until M appears in the You can also use kickdown for maximum
multi-function display. acceleration in manual drive program M.
If the selector lever is in position D, you can X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
shift up or down through the gears. The gear pressure point.
selected is shown in the multi-function dis- The transmission shifts to a lower gear
play. depending on the engine speed.
Upshifting i It is not possible to shift gears using the
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right steering wheel gearshift paddles or the
towards D+ selector lever during kickdown.
or
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 88).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 90

Instrument cluster Speedometer with segments (vehi-

cles with 12-button luxury multi-func-
Points to remember tion steering wheel*)
You will find an illustration of the instrument
The segments in the speedometer indicate
cluster in the "At a glance" section.
which speed range is available.
Vehicles with a multi-function steering wheel
(4 buttons) (Y page 24) Cruise control* mode:
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering The segments light up from the stored speed
Controls
wheel* (12 buttons) (Y page 26) to the maximum speed.

Variable Speedtronic* mode:
G Risk of accident
The segments light up from the start of the
No further messages can be displayed if the
scale to the selected limit speed.
instrument cluster and/or the multi-function
display fails.
This means that you will not see information Rev counter
about the driving situation, such as the speed,
outside temperature, warning/indicator The red band in the rev counter indicates the
lamps, display messages or system failures. engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be interrupted to protect the engine when the
affected. Adjust your driving style and speed red band is reached.
accordingly. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
Immediately consult a qualified specialist Doing so will damage the engine.
workshop which has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that Outside temperature display
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
this purpose. In particular, work relevant to G Risk of accident
safety or on safety-related systems must be When the temperature displayed is just above
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. freezing point, the road surface may be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
Coolant temperature gauge driving style. Always adapt your driving style
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
The coolant temperature gauge is in the weather conditions.
instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Under normal operating conditions and with Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem- played after a short delay.
perature may rise to 120 †. The coolant tem-
perature may rise to the top end of the scale
at high outside temperatures and on long
uphill stretches.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 91

On-board computer (4-button multi-function steering wheel) 91
On-board computer (4-button multi- : Multi-function display

function steering wheel)
; W
Points to remember Rincreases the volume
The on-board computer is activated as soon Rsets the date/time
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock. You can use the on-board computer to = X
call up information relating to your vehicle Rdecreases the volume
Controls
and to make and adjust settings.
Rsets the date/time
G Risk of accident
? C
Only use the on-board computer when road
Rselects a submenu
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen- Rscrolls through lists
trate properly on driving, and could cause an Rconfirms a selection
accident.
A V
Rpress briefly: selects a menu
Multi-function steering wheel (4-but-
Rpress and hold: selects the stand-
tons)
ard display
You can control the multi-function display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel. Multi-function display
To activate the multi-function display:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rswitch on the lights
Ropen the driver's door
Multi-function display : shows you values

and settings as well as display messages.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 92

92 On-board computer (4-button multi-function steering wheel)
Menus and submenus

Controls
Function Standard display
: Standard display (Y page 92)

Shows the standard display or resets
the trip meter
; Trip computer (Y page 92)
Shows or resets the trip computer
= Range/current consumption
(Y page 93) X Press and hold the V button until the
standard display with trip meter : and
? Additional speedometer total distance recorder ; is shown.
A Message memory (Y page 176) To reset the trip meter:
B Service (Y page 167) X Press and hold the V button until the
Calls up the service due date standard display appears.
X Press and hold the C button until the
C Tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Y page 153) value has been reset.
D Time/date(Y page 93) Trip computer

X Press the V button repeatedly until the
The number of menus shown depends on the
optional equipment in the vehicle. trip computer appears.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 93

On-board computer (12-button multi-function steering wheel*) 93
On-board computer (12-button multi-

function steering wheel*)
Points to remember
The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
: Distance
Controls
; Average speed G Risk of accident
= Time Only use the on-board computer when road
? Average fuel consumption and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
X To reset the trip computer: press and trate properly on driving, and could cause an
hold the C button until the values have accident.
been reset.
Displaying the range and current fuel Luxury multi-function steering wheel
consumption (12 buttons)
X Press the V button repeatedly until the You can control the multi-function display and
approximate range and current fuel con- the settings in the on-board computer using
sumption appears. the buttons on the luxury multi-function
steering wheel.
The approximate range which can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
range.
Time/date
This menu is only available on vehicles with
Audio 20.
X Press the V button repeatedly until the
"Time/date" menu appears.
X To set: use the C button to select the
display you want to change: hour, minutes,
day, month, year.
X Press W or X to set the selected dis-
play.
X To save: press the C button.
The next display is selected.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 94

94 On-board computer (12-button multi-function steering wheel*)
: Multi-function display 9: Press and hold:

; in the Audio menu, selects the pre-
6 ~ Accepts or rejects/ends
vious/next station or selects an
a call
audio track or video scene* using the
WX increases/reduces the fast scrolling feature.
volume In the Tel (telephone) menu, starts
8 Mute rapid scrolling through the telephone
book
Controls
= ? Activates voice control*, see

separate operating instructions. a Confirms selections and hides
display messages.
? % Press briefly:
In the Tel (telephone) menu:
back, deactivates voice control* and switches to the telephone book and
fades out display messages starts dialling.
%Press and hold:
selects the standard display.
A =; Calls up the menu bar and Multi-function display
selects menus To activate the multi-function display:
Rswitch on the ignition
9:Press briefly:
selects a submenu or scrolls through Rswitch on the lights
lists. Ropen the driver's door
In the Audio menu, selects a stored
station, an audio track or a video Values, settings and display messages are
scene*. shown in the description field in the multi-
In the Tel (telephone) menu, function display.
switches to the telephone book and
selects a name or telephone number
: Description field
; Menu bar
X To show menu bar ;: press the =

or ; button.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 95

Menus and submenus
Controls
Function Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
COMAND APS*.
: Trip menu (Y page 95)
; Navi* menu (navigation details)
Trip menu
(Y page 97)
i Reset the trip meter or trip computer
= Audio* menu (Y page 98)
(Y page 96).
? Tel* menu (telephone) (Y page 99) Use the buttons on the luxury multi-function
steering wheel.
A Service menu (Y page 101)
Rcalls up display messages
Standard display
(Y page 176)
Rtyre pressure loss warning system
(Y page 153)
RASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play (Y page 167)
B Settings menu (Y page 101)
X Press and hold the % button until the
The number of menus shown depends on the
Trip menu with trip meter : and total
optional equipment in the vehicle.
distance recorder ; is shown.
The Audio*, Navi* and Tel* menus are dis-
played slightly differently in vehicles with an
audio system* and vehicles with COMAND
APS*. The examples given in this Owner's
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 96

Trip computer "After start" or "After

reset"
The values in the After start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the After reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Controls
X Press the = or ; button to select the

current fuel consumption : and approxi-
Trip menu.
mate range ;.
X Press 9 or : to select After
The approximate range ; is calculated
start or After reset.
according to current driving style and the
amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a
small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the
display shows a vehicle being refuelled
C instead of range ;.
Additional speedometer
Trip computer "After start" (example) X Press the = or ; button to select the
: Distance Trip menu.
; Time X Press the 9 or : button to select the
= Average speed additional speedometer.

? Average fuel consumption
The trip computer function From start is
automatically reset when
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than 4 hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
: Additional speedometer
R9,999 kilometres/miles have been excee-
ded.
Resetting
The From reset message is shown and the
trip computer is automatically reset if the You can reset the following functions:
value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilome- Rtrip meter
tres/miles. Rtrip computer "After start"
Rtrip computer "After reset"
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption* X Press the = or ; button to select the
X Press the = or ; button to select the Trip menu.
Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 97

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced
Resetting the trip computer "After start" (example)
Controls
X Press the : button to select yes and
press the a button to confirm. : Distance to destination
; Distance to next change of direction
= Current road
Navigation* menu
? Symbol for "follow the road's course"
When in the Navi menu, navigation instruc-
tions are shown in the multi-function display. Change of direction announced without
For more information, see the separate oper- change of lane
ating instructions.
Use the buttons on the luxury multi-function
steering wheel.
Navi menu.
Route guidance inactive : Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Symbol for change of direction
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see visual distance display ; next to
Vehicle heading display (example) symbol for change of direction =. This
: Vehicle heading decreases in size as you approach the
announced change of direction.
; Current road*
Change of direction announced with
change of lane
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 98

ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position

is outside the area of the digital map (off-
map position).
RNo route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
For further information on the status indica-
: Road into which the change of direction tor, see the separate operating instructions.
Controls
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display Audio* menu
= Lane recommendation Use the functions in the Audio menu to oper-
? Symbol for change of direction ate the audio system or COMAND APS*.
On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation Use the buttons on the luxury multi-function
= may be shown for the next change of steering wheel.
direction. Lanes may be added during a X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
change of direction. APS* and select the desired function (see
separate operating instructions).
Selecting a radio station

You can only change the waveband and store
new stations using the audio system or
COMAND APS*.
Lane recommendation display (example) X Press the = or ; button to select the
: Uninterrupted lane Audio menu.
; New lane during a change of direction
= Lane recommended for the change of
direction
For further information on lane recommenda-
tions, see the separate operating instruc-
tions.
Navigation status indicators in the multi- : Waveband
function display ; Station
Display messages are shown in the multi-
If station ; has been stored, the memory
function display, for example:
position will also be displayed.
RO: you have reached the destination.
X To select a stored channel: briefly press
RNew route... or Calculating route: a the 9 or : button.
new route is being calculated. X To select a channel from the channel
list: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
X To select a station using the station
search (only if no station list is received):
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 99

press and briefly hold the 9 or :

button.
i DAB* radio mode23 (Digital Audio Broad-
casting) (see the separate operating
instructions for the audio system* or
COMAND APS*).
: Current scene
Controls
Operating the audio player or audio
X To select the next or previous scene:
media*
briefly press the 9 or the : button.
Audio data from various audio devices or X To select a scene from the scene list
media can be played, depending on the equip- (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
ment fitted in the vehicle. 9 or : button until the desired
X Press the = or ; button to select the scene has been reached.
Audio menu.
Tel* menu
Functions and displays are dependent on the
optional equipment installed in your vehicle.
You can establish a Bluetooth wireless con-
nection to the audio system or to COMAND
APS* (see separate operating instructions).
CD player display (example)
: Current track G Risk of accident
Observe the legal requirements of the country
X To select the next/previous track: in which you are currently driving regarding
briefly press the 9 or : button. the use of mobile phones in the vehicle.
X To select a track from the track list
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the the vehicle is in motion, you should only use
9 or : button until the desired track them when the road and traffic conditions
has been reached. allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
When track information is stored on the audio the traffic conditions, cause an accident and
drive or audio media, the number and name injure yourself and others.
of the track appear in the multi-function dis-
play. The current track does not appear in Use the buttons on the luxury multi-function
audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: exter- steering wheel.
nal audio source connected). X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys-
tem or COMAND APS* (see separate oper-
Operating video DVDs* ating instructions).
Tel menu.
Audio menu.
23 Only for certain countries.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 100

Mobile phone on X To copy the phone book of your mobile

phone to the audio system* or COMAND
PIN*not yet entered APS*, see the separate operating instruc-
The multi-function display shows the Please tions for the audio system* or COMAND
enter PIN display message. APS*.
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Lin-
guatronic*, the audio system or COMAND Tel menu.
APS*.
Controls
X Press the 9, : or a button to call

The mobile phone will search for a network.
up the phone book.
During this time, the Telephone No
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
Service message appears in the multi-
function display. desired name.
To scroll rapidly, press and hold the 9
Mobile phone operational or : button for longer than 1 second.
The multi-function display shows the Tele- The scrolling speed will then increase.
phone ready message or the name of the Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
GSM network provider. button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button
If there is an incoming call and you are in the to start dialling.
Tel menu, the multi-function display shows a or
message, for example: X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ling.
or
X Press the 6 button to accept the call. X If you do not want to make a call: press
You can accept a call even if you are not in the ~ button.
the Tel menu.
Redialling
Rejecting or ending a call
The on-board computer saves the last names
X Press the ~ button. or numbers dialled in the redial memory.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not X Press the = or ; button to select the
in the Tel menu. Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
Dialling a number from the phone book redial memory.
If your mobile phone is able to receive calls,
you can search for and dial a number from the
phone book in the audio system or COMAND
APS* at any time.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 101

X Press the 9 or : button to select the Instrument cluster

desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
Selecting the units for speed and distance
ling. The Display Unit Speed-/odometer:
function allows you to choose whether the
multi-function display shows km/h or mph in
certain cases.
Service menu
The selected units apply to:
Controls
Rthe odometer and the trip meter
Rthe trip computer
Rthe additional speedometer in the Trip
menu
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi*
In the Service menu, you can: menu
Rcall up display messages (Y page 176) Rcruise control*
Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system RSpeedtronic*
(Y page 153) X Press the = or ; button to select the
Rcall up the service due date (Y page 167) Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu.
Settings menu
X Press the a button to confirm.
Display unit Speed-/odometer: func-
tion.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
In the Settings menu you can: Selecting the permanent display function
Rchange the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 101) i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this
function is not available.
Rchange the time/date settings
(Y page 102) The Permanent display: function allows
you to choose whether the multi-function dis-
Rchange the light settings (Y page 102) play always shows the outside temperature
Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 104) or the speed in mph.
Rchange the convenience settings X Press the = or ; button to select the
(Y page 104) Settings menu.
Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 104) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Use the buttons on the luxury multi-function Inst. cluster submenu.

steering wheel. X Press the a button to confirm.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 102

X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to change it.
Permanent display: function. X Press the = or ; button to select the
You will see the selected setting: outside display to be changed: hours, minutes.
temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]. X Press the : or 9 button to set the
X Press the a button to save the setting. selected display.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
Time/date
Setting the date
Controls
This submenu is only available on vehicles

with Audio 20.
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the Settings menu.
following audio systems: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Time/date submenu.
A: Audio 20
B: Audio 50 APS*
C: COMAND APS*
Date: function.
X You can see which audio system is fitted in You will see the date currently set.
your vehicle by referring to the separate X Press the a button to change it.
operating instructions.
Depending on the audio system fitted, time display to be changed: day, month, year.
and date are received from GPS satellites and
X Press the : or 9 button to set the
therefore cannot be set using the on-board
computer. Refer to the following table. selected display.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
A B C
Set using the on-board com- X Lights
puter
Switching the daytime driving lights on/
Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X off
tion
If you have activated the Daytime driving
Set the time zone just once (see X X lights: function and the light switch is in the
separate operating instructions) $ or c position, the dipped-beam
headlamps are switched on automatically
In the Time/date submenu, you can set the when the engine is running.
time and date. In countries where daytime driving lights are
legally required, On is the factory setting.
Setting the time
Settings menu.
Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.
Time/date submenu. X Press the a button to confirm.
Time: function.
You will see the time currently set.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 103

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Rthe side lamps

Daytime driving lights: function. Rthe front foglamps
You will see the selected setting: On or
Rthe licence plate lighting
Off.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button to select the
Settings menu.
Activating/deactivating the Intelligent X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light System* Light submenu.
Controls
When you activate the Intell. Light Sys- X Press the a button to confirm.
tem: function, you activate the following: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rmotorway mode
Surround lighting: function.
Ractive light function You will see the selected setting: On or
Rcornering light function Off.
Rextended range foglamps
X Press the = or ; button to select the Deactivating the delayed switch-off tempora-
rily:
Settings menu.
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock.
Light submenu.
lock and back to position 0.
Delayed switch-off is deactivated.
Intell. Light System: function. Delayed switch-off is deactivated the next
You will see the selected setting: On or time you start the engine.
Off.
X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off
Activating or deactivating the surround When you activate the Interior lighting
lighting and exterior lighting delayed delay sw. off: function and remove the
switch-off key from the ignition lock, the interior lighting
The Surround lighting: function allows remains on for around 10 seconds if it is dark.
you to set whether the exterior lighting should X Press the = or ; button to select the
come on when it is dark: Settings menu.
Rfor 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle
with the key. Light submenu.
The exterior lighting switches off when you X Press the a button to confirm.
open the driver’s door.
Rfor 15 seconds after switching off the Interior lighting delay sw. off:
engine and closing the doors. function.
If the engine is switched off and then none You will see the selected setting: On or
of the doors are opened, or if an open door Off.
is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out X Press the a button to save the setting.
after 60 seconds.
If you activate the Surround lighting:
function, the following light up:
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 104

Vehicle X Press the = or ; button to select the

Settings menu.
Set permanent SPEEDTRONIC with Limit
speed (winter tyres): (Y page 113).
Convenience submenu.
Activating/deactivating automatic door X Press the a button to confirm.
locking
If you select the Automatic Door Locks:
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
Controls

a speed of around 15 km/h.
Off.
For more information on automatic door lock-
ing, see (Y page 59).
X Press the = or ; button to select the Switching the fold in mirrors when lock-
Settings menu. ing*function on/off
X Press the : or 9 button to select the If you switch on the Fold mirrors in when
Vehicle submenu. locking: function, the exterior mirrors fold
X Press the a button to confirm. in when you lock the vehicle. When you
X Press the : or 9 button to select the unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's
Automatic door locks: function. or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors
fold out again.
Off. If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
on the door (Y page 68), they will not fold out
automatically. The exterior mirrors can then
Convenience only be folded out using the button on the
door.
Activating/deactivating the easy-entry/
exit feature*
Settings menu.
You can use the Easy-Entry/Exit: function
to activate or deactivate the easy-entry/exit
feature (Y page 67). Convenience submenu.
G Risk of injury
The steering wheel moves when the EASY-
Fold in mirrors when locking: func-
ENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk
tion.
of occupants becoming trapped. Before acti-
vating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make You will see the selected setting: On or
sure that nobody can become trapped. Off.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could open the Restoring the factory settings
driver's door and thereby unintentionally acti-
For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:
vate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and
the Limit Speed (winter tyres): func-
become trapped.
tion in permanent Speedtronic can only be set
in the Vehicle submenu. The Daytime
driving lights: function in the Lights
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 105

Off-road driving 105
submenu is only reset if the vehicle is sta- G Risk of accident

tionary. 4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident
X Press the = or ; button to select the if you drive too fast.
Settings menu. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
Factory setting submenu. necessary when pulling away.
X Press the a button to confirm. Raccelerate less when driving.
Controls
The Reset all settings? message is Radapt your driving style to suit road and
shown.
traffic conditions.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
Yes or No.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
tion. you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
If you have selected Yes, the multi-function chains if necessary.
display shows a confirmation message.
! When testing the parking brake, operate
the vehicle only briefly (for a maximum of
Off-road driving ten seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.
When doing this, turn the key to position
Overview of off-road driving systems 0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can
The systems which are relevant for off-road cause damage to the drive train or the
driving are explained on the following pages: brake system.
R4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive), for ! A function or performance test should
optimum traction only be carried out on a twin-axle dyna-
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)* (vehi- mometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle
cles with Off-Road Pro engineering pack- on such a dynamometer, please consult a
age*), which assists you when driving Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in advance.
downhill You could otherwise damage the drive train
ROff-road
or the brake system.
driving program* (vehicles with
Off-road Pro engineering package*), which
assists you when driving off-road DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)*
You will find further information about driving (vehicles with the off-road engineer-
off-road in the "Operation" section ing package*)
(Y page 158).
You will find information about driving off-
road in the "Operation" section
(Y page 158).
4MATIC* (permanent four-wheel
drive) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- selected on the on-board computer. The
manently driven. Together with ESP® and steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the
ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driv-
whenever a drive wheel spins due to insuffi- ing on flat stretches of road or on an uphill
cient grip.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 106

106 Off-road driving
gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or

non-existent.
G Risk of accident
DSR is only an aid designed to assist you when
driving downhill. You are responsible for keep-
ing control of the vehicle and for assessing
whether the downhill gradient can be man-
aged.
Controls
When activating DSR the vehicle may brake

suddenly due to DSR intervening. This is
dependent on the downhill gradient and the X Press button ;.
difference between the current speed and the Indicator lamp : lights up.
speed set. DSR may not always be able to
keep to the set speed, depending on road sur- Vehicles with the multi-function steering
face and tyre conditions. You could lose con- wheel (4 button): in the left-hand status
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident. indicator a message appears, e.g. DSR
4 km/h.
Select a set speed suitable for the prevailing
conditions and when necessary, apply the Vehicles with the luxury multi-function steer-
brakes manually. ing wheel* (12 button): in the multi-function
display a message appears, e.g. the DSR mes-
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed in the D, R sage:
and N selector lever positions. You can drive
at a higher or a lower speed than that set on
the on-board computer at any time by accel-
erating or braking.
G Risk of accident
If you depress the accelerator pedal with DSR
activated, then the set speed can be excee-
ded. Drive downhill with special care and If the current vehicle speed is too high, DSR
always keep in mind that DSR brakes the vehi- symbol = appears in the multi-function dis-
cle as soon as you remove your foot from the play. In addition, on vehicles with the multi-
accelerator pedal. The vehicle may be heavily function steering wheel (4 button), the Max.
braked by DSR depending on the gradient and 30 km/h message is displayed and in vehicles
the difference between the vehicle's road with the luxury multi-function steering
speed and the set speed. You could lose con- wheel* (12 button), the Max. speed
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident. 30 km/h message is displayed.
Activating/deactivating DSR Deactivating

X Press button ;.
Activating Indicator lamp : goes out.
You can only activate DSR when driving at a DSR symbol = appears in the multi-func-
speeds below 30 km/h. tion display with the Off message.
DSR switches off automatically if you drive
faster than 35 km/h. The DSR symbol
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 107

appears in the multi-function display with the Off-road drive program* (vehicles
Off message. You also hear a warning tone. with off-road engineering package*)
Changing the set speed while the vehi- The off-road drive program assists you in driv-
cle is in motion ing off-road and when fording. The engine’s
performance characteristics and the gear-
When DSR is activated, you can change the shifting characteristics of the automatic
set speed to a value between 4 km/h and transmission are adapted for this purpose.
18 km/h while the vehicle is in motion. ABS, ESP® and ETS programs especially
Controls
adapted to off-road driving are also activated.
Do not use the off-road drive program on
roads that are snowy or icy or if you have fit-
ted your vehicle with snow chains.
X To increase or reduce the set speed by

1 km/hincrements: briefly press the
cruise control lever to the pressure point
up : for a higher set speed or down ; for
a lower set speed. X To activate: press button ;.
On vehicles with the multi-function steering Indicator lamp : lights up.
wheel (4 button), the set value appears in
On vehicles with the luxury multi-function
the left-hand status indicator. On vehicles
with the luxury multi-function steering steering wheel* (12 button): in the multi-func-
tion display you see the off-road symbol:
wheel* (12 button), the set value appears
in the multi-function display.
X To increase or reduce the set speed by
2 km/hincrements: briefly press the
cruise control beyond the pressure point
up : for a higher set speed or down ; for
a lower set speed.
On vehicles with the multi-function steering
wheel (4 button), the set value appears in X To deactivate: press button ;.
the left-hand status indicator. On vehicles Indicator lamp : goes out. On vehicles
with the luxury multi-function steering with the luxury multi-function steering
wheel* (12 button), the set value appears wheel* (12 button), the off-road display
in the multi-function display. = also goes off.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 108

108 Driving systems
Driving systems Always pay attention to traffic conditions

even when cruise control is activated.
Overview of driving systems
Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist
The vehicle's driving systems are described driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
on the following pages: speed and for braking in good time.
Rcruise control* and Speedtronic*, which
G Risk of accident
are used to control the speed of the vehicle
Do not use cruise control:
Controls
RParktronic*,
which assists you in parking Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
and manoeuvring allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g.
Rreversing camera*, which assists you when heavy traffic or winding roads). You could
parking and manoeuvring otherwise cause an accident.
The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP® Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating
and EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) could cause the drive wheels to lose trac-
driving safety systems are described in the tion and the vehicle could then skid.
"Driving safety systems" section Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
(Y page 51). heavy rain or snow
Cruise control display in the speedom-

Cruise control*
eter (vehicles with the luxury multi-
Cruise control maintains a constant road function steering wheel*, 12 buttons)
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and When cruise control is activated, the seg-
steep downhill gradients, especially if the ments from the set speed to the maximum
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must speed light up in the multi-function display.
select shift range 1, 2 or3 in good time. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine, which relieves the load
on the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
the vehicle could skid.
: Segments
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
Cruise control lever
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h. You can operate cruise control and variable
Speedtronic with the cruise control lever.
G Risk of accident
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
Cruise control cannot take account of road
lever indicates which system you have selec-
and traffic conditions.
ted:
RLIM indicator lamp off:
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 109

Driving systems 109
cruise control is selected X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

RLIM indicator lamp lit: speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
variable Speedtronic is selected
pressure point up : or down ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
Controls
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed Storing the current speed or calling up
; LIM indicator lamp the last stored speed
= To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed G Risk of accident
? To store the current speed or a lower Only select a stored speed if you know what
speed that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
A To switch between cruise control and var- current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceler-
iable Speedtronic ation or braking could endanger you or others.
B To deactivate cruise control
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
When cruise control is activated, the stored you =.
speed is displayed in the multi-function dis- X Remove your foot from the accelerator
play for five seconds. In vehicles with the pedal.
multi-function steering wheel (4 button), the The first time cruise control is activated, it
stored speed is then permanently displayed stores the current speed or regulates the
in the status indicator together with the speed of the vehicle to the previously
¯ symbol. stored speed.
Selecting cruise control Setting a speed

X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. X Press the cruise control lever to the pres-
If it is off, cruise control is already selected. sure point up : for a higher speed or
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in down ? for a lower speed.
the direction of arrow A. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control the desired speed is reached.
lever goes off. Cruise control is selected. X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
You can store the current speed if you are ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
driving faster than 30 km/h.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 110

110 Driving systems
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
to the last speed stored after you have fin- Ryou move the selector lever to N while driv-
ished overtaking.
ing
i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
the cruise control lever is assisted by auto- a warning tone. You see the Cruise control
matic application of the brakes. off message in the multi-function display for
On long downhill gradients, the automatic approximately five seconds.
Controls
transmission also shifts down. i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
Making adjustments in 1 km/hincre-
ments
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the Speedtronic*
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you
down ? for a lower speed. do not exceed the set speed. On long and
The last speed stored is increased or steep downhill gradients, especially if the
reduced. vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
select shift range 1, 2 or3 in good time. By
Making adjustments in 10 km/hincre- doing so, you will make use of the braking
ments effect of the engine, which relieves the load
on the brake system and prevents the brakes
X Briefly press the cruise control lever from overheating and wearing too quickly. If
beyond the pressure point up : for a you need additional braking, depress the
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. brake pedal repeatedly rather than continu-
The last speed stored is increased or ously.
reduced.
G Risk of accident
Deactivating cruise control Never depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
There are several ways to deactivate cruise the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
control: pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- to overheat, increases the braking distance
wards B. and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
or G Risk of accident
X Brake. Do not change down for additional engine
or braking on a slippery road surface. This could
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
direction of arrow A. the vehicle could skid.
Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-
cator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
lights up.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou depress the parking brake
Ryou drive at less than 30 km/h
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 111

Driving systems 111
You can set a variable or permanent limit = To store the current speed or call up the
speed: last stored speed
Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up ? To store the current speed or a lower
areas speed
Rpermanent for long-term speed restric- A To switch between cruise control* and
tions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres variable Speedtronic
(Y page 112) B To deactivate variable Speedtronic
Controls
G Risk of accident Selecting variable Speedtronic
Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
speed and for braking in good time. If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already
selected.
i The speed indicated in the speedometer If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
may differ slightly from the limit speed the direction of arrow A.
stored. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is
Variable Speedtronic selected.
You can operate cruise control* and variable G Risk of accident
Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control driver of the limit speed stored.
lever indicates which system you have selec- Only use Speedtronic when you do not have
ted: to accelerate suddenly to a speed higher than
RLIM indicator lamp off: the stored limit speed allows. You could, oth-
Cruise control* is selected erwise, cause an accident.
RLIM
You can only exceed the limit speed stored if
indicator lamp lit:
you deactivate variable Speedtronic:
variable Speedtronic is selected
Rusing the cruise control lever
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
Rby depressing the accelerator pedal
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running. beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
tronic by braking.
Storing the current speed

You can use the cruise control lever to limit
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point up : or down ?.
The current speed is stored. For five sec-
: To store the current speed or a higher onds, the multi-function display shows the
speed stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h.
; LIM indicator lamp
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 112

112 Driving systems
Vehicles with the multi-function steering up : for a higher speed or down ? for a
wheel (4 button): the stored speed is per- lower speed.
manently displayed in the status indicator,
e.g. LIM 100 km/h. Deactivating variable Speedtronic
Vehicles with the luxury multi-function
There are several ways to deactivate variable
steering wheel* (12 button): the segments
Speedtronic:
from the start of the scale up to the stored
speed light up in the speedometer. X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Controls
wards B.
Storing the current speed or calling up or
the last stored speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow A.
G Risk of accident
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
Only select a stored speed if you know what
lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
deactivated.
current driving and traffic situation. Other-
wise, sudden braking could endanger you or Cruise control* is selected.
others. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automat-
ically when you depress the accelerator pedal
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but
you =. only if your current speed does not differ by
more than 20 km/h from the stored speed.
Making fine adjustments in You will hear a warning tone if this is the case.
1 km/hincrements G Risk of accident
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or tronic by braking.
down ? for a lower speed.
or i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
pressure point until the desired speed is
set. Press the cruise control lever, up :
Permanent Speedtronic (vehicles with
the luxury multi-function steering
for a higher speed or down ? for a lower
wheel*, 12 buttons)
speed.
i Permanent Speedtronic is only available
Making adjustments in 10 km/hincre- in certain countries.
ments You can use the on-board computer to limit
X Briefly press the cruise control lever the speed permanently to a value between
beyond the pressure point up : for a 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres)
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. and the maximum speed.
or Just before the stored speed is reached, it
appears in the multi-function display.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
beyond the pressure point until the desired You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, even if you depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 113

Driving systems 113
Setting permanent Speedtronic Parktronic is an electronic parking aid with

X Press = or ; to highlight the Set- ultrasound. It indicates visually and audibly
tings menu and select with a. the distance between your vehicle and an
object.
X Press : or 9 to highlight the Vehi-
Parktronic is automatically activated when
cle submenu and select with a. you switch on the ignition and release the
X Press : or 9 to select the Limit handbrake.
speed (winter tyres): function. Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above
Controls
You can see the current setting. 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
X To change this, press a. Parktronic monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
X Press : or 9 to select the desired

setting.
The following settings can be selected:
ROff
Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated.

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,
Ra limit speed between 230 km/h and
left-hand side
160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h
X Press a to save the entry. Range of the sensors
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
slush; otherwise, they may not function cor-
Parktronic* rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
G Risk of accident care not to scratch or damage them.
Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect
all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive
driving.
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. You could, otherwise, endanger
yourself and others.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
Side view
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 114

114 Driving systems
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.

The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-
ment.
Controls
Front sensors
Centre Approximately 100 cm
Corners Approximately 60 cm
Warning display for front area
Rear sensors : Left-hand side of the vehicle
; Right-hand side of the vehicle
= Indicator segments
Corners Approximately 80 cm
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
! When parking, pay particular attention to ments. Parktronic is operational if yellow indi-
objects above or below the sensors, such cator segments = light up.
as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic The selector lever position determines which
does not detect such objects when they are warning display is active:
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects. Selector lever Warning display
position
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brake D Front area activated
system or a pneumatic drill could cause
Parktronic to malfunction. R orN Rear and front areas
activated
Minimum distance
P No areas activated
Corners Approximately 15 cm One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance to the obstacle.
If there is an obstacle within this range, all
warning displays light up and a tone sounds. From the:
If the distance falls below the minimum clear- Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
ance, it may no longer be shown. intermittent warning tone for approxi-
mately two seconds.
Warning displays Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
The warning displays show the distance warning tone for approximately two sec-
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 115

Driving systems 115
onds. You have reached the minimum dis- The reversing camera is located in the handle
tance. strip of the tailgate.
Deactivating/activating Parktronic
Controls
: Reversing camera
: Indicator lamp View through the camera

; To deactivate/activate Parktronic The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a
If indicator lamp : lights up, Parktronic is mirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror.
deactivated. G Risk of accident
i Parktronic is automatically activated The reversing camera is only an aid and may
when you turn the key to position 2 in the display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect
ignition lock. manner, or may not even display them at all.
The reversing camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to pay attention. The cam-
Trailer towing*
era cannot show objects:
Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area Rvery near to the rear bumper
when you establish an electrical connection
Rbelow the rear bumper
between your vehicle and a trailer.
Rthat are located above the tailgate handle
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
recess
hitch is not required. Parktronic measures
the minimum detection range to an obsta- You are always responsible for safety and
cle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. This applies to the areas
Reversing camera* behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You
could, otherwise, endanger yourself and oth-
The reversing camera is an optical aid. It ers.
shows the area behind your vehicle in the
COMAND APS display. G Risk of accident
G Risk of injury Under the following circumstances, the
reversing camera will not function, or function
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
in a limited manner:
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
Rif the tailgate is open
could be injured.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 116

116 Driving systems
Rat night or in very dark places injure others or damage objects and your
Rifthe camera is exposed to very bright vehicle while you are parking.
white light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the dis-
Activating the reversing camera
play may flicker) X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, the ignition lock.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in X Make sure that the "Activated autom. in
Controls
winter reverse gear" setting is active in COMAND

Rif
APS (see the separate operating instruc-
the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
tions for COMAND APS).
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
X Engage reverse gear.
event have the camera position and setting The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. COMAND APS display.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
The area behind the vehicle shown in the
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
COMAND APS display can be hidden (see the
purpose.
separate operating instructions for COMAND
Do not use the reversing camera in these APS).
types of situation. You could, otherwise,
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 117

Air conditioning 117
Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning systems
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems:
2-zone Thermatic
The 2-zone Thermatic automatic air condi-
tioning system combines an automatic heat-
Controls
ing and ventilation system with a cooling sys-
tem. You can control the temperature sepa-
rately for the driver's and front-passenger
sides.
Front control unit
3-zone Thermotronic*
The 3-zone Thermotronic automatic air con-
ditioning system combines an automatic
heating and ventilation system with a cooling
system. You can control the temperature
separately for the driver's and front-
passenger sides and the rear compartment.
You can control the airflow separately for the
Front control unit front and rear compartments. You can con-
trol the air distribution separately for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
Rear control panel
General notes i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period

during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
2-zone Thermatic/3-zone Thermotronic* venience opening feature (Y page 82). This
controls the temperature and the humidity of will speed up the cooling process and the
the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable desired vehicle interior temperature will be
substances from the air. reached more quickly.
2-zone Thermatic/3-zone Thermotronic* is
only operational when the engine is i The integrated filter can filter out most
running.24 Optimum operation is only ach- particles of dust and completely filters out
ieved when you drive with the side windows pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
and panorama sliding sunroof* closed. of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
this reason, you should always observe the
24 3-zone Thermotronic*: the "residual heat" function can only be activated or deactivated if the ignition is turned off.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 118

118 Air conditioning
interval for replacing the filter, which is could mist up. This may obstruct your view of
specified in the Service Booklet. As it the traffic situation and, as a result, you may
depends on environmental conditions, e.g. cause an accident.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
G Risk of accident
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. Otherwise, the windows
Controls
Overview of air-conditioning system functions

2-zone Thermatic
Function Function
: Sets the temperature, left F Increases the airflow
; Sets the air-conditioning system to G Reduces the airflow
automatic
H Display
= Switches the air conditioning on/
I Sets the air distribution
off
? Switches the mono function on/off
i Instructions and recommendations for
A Switches cooling with air dehumid- optimum air conditioning:
ification on/off Ractivate the air conditioning using
B Demists the windscreen the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indica-
tor lamps in the Ã and ¿ buttons
C Activates/deactivates air-recircu-
come on.
lation mode
Rset the temperature to 22 †.
D Sets the temperature, right
Ronly use the "demisting" function briefly,
E Switches the rear window heating until the windscreen is clear again.
on/off Ronly use the "air-recirculation" mode
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out-
side odours or when in a tunnel. Other-
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 119

wise, the windows could mist up due to tion settings from the driver's side for the
a lack of fresh air. front-passenger side. The indicator lamp
Ruse the "MONO" function if you want to in the º button comes on.
adopt the temperature and air distribu-
Controls
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 120

3-zone Thermotronic*
Controls
Function Function
Front control unit H Reduces the airflow
: Sets the temperature, left I Display
; Sets the air-conditioning system to J Sets the air distribution, left
automatic
K Activates/deactivates air-recircu-
= Switches the air conditioning on/ lation mode
off
Rear control panel
? Switches the mono function on/off
L Increases the temperature
A Switches cooling with air dehumid-
M Display
ification on/off
B N Increases the airflow
Switches the residual heat function
on/off O Reduces the airflow
C Demists the windscreen P Reduces the temperature
D Sets the temperature, right
E Switches the rear window heating i Instructions and recommendations for
on/off optimum air conditioning:
Ractivate
the air conditioning using
F Sets the air distribution, right
the Ã and ¿ buttons. The indica-
G Increases the airflow
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 121

tor lamps in the Ã and ¿ buttons X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
come on. lock.
Rset the temperature to 22 †. X To activate: press the Ã button.
Ronly use the "demisting" function briefly,

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
until the windscreen is clear again.
automatic mode.
Ronly use the "air-recirculation" mode or
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out-
X Press the ^ button.
Controls
side odours or when in a tunnel. Other-
wise, the windows could mist up due to The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
a lack of fresh air. out. The previously selected settings come
into effect again.
Ruse the "MONO" function if you want to X To switch off: press the ^ button.
adopt the temperature and air distribu-
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
tion settings from the driver's side for all
air-conditioning zones. The indicator up.
lamp in the º button comes on.
Ruse the "residual heat" function if you Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
want to heat or ventilate the vehicle inte- fication on/off
rior when the ignition is switched off. The
"residual heat" function can only be acti- The "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
vated or deactivated with the ignition tion is only available when the engine is run-
switched off. ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected. This prevents the windows from
Switching the air conditioning on/off misting up.
i When the air conditioning is switched off, G Risk of accident

the air supply and air circulation are also If the "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
switched off. Only select this setting briefly, tion is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle
otherwise the windows may mist up. will not be cooled (during warm weather) or
dehumidified. The windows could mist up
i Activate the air conditioning primarily more quickly. This may prevent you from
using the Ã button (Y page 122). observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
ing an accident.
Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling
mode.
X To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button
comes on.
X To switch off: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The cooling with air dehumidification
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 122

Controlling the air conditioning auto- 3-zone Thermotronic*

matically
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
Controls
The automatic air conditioning will achieve

optimal operation if "cooling with air dehu-
midification" is also activated. If necessary,
cooling with air dehumidification can be deac-
tivated.
Air-conditioning zones for 3-zone Thermotronic*
lock. You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
X Set the desired temperature.
well as for the rear compartment.
X To activate: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
lock.
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
X To increase/reduce the front tempera-
are activated.
ture: turn thumbwheels : and D clock-
X To switch off: press the Ã button. wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 120). Only
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes change the temperature setting in small
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow increments. Start at 22 †.
are deactivated. X To increase/reduce temperature in the
rear compartment: press button 9
or : . Only change the temperature set-
Setting the temperature ting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
2-zone Thermatic
Different temperatures can be set for the Adjusting the air vents
driver's and front-passenger sides.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition G Risk of injury
lock. Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
X To increase/reduce: turn thumb- vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to
wheels : and D clockwise or anti-clock- bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air
wise (Y page 118). Only change the tem-
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away
perature setting in small increments. Start
to a different area of the vehicle interior.
at 22 †.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 123

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
through the air vents into the vehicle interior, down.
please observe the following notes:
i Demister vent : is never completely
Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
shut, even if side air vent ; is shut.
and the bonnet free of blockages, such as
ice, snow or leaves.
Setting the glove compartment air vent
Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet
grilles in the vehicle interior. The glove compartment can be ventilated
Controls
when 2-zone Thermatic/3-zone
i For draught-free ventilation, adjust the Thermotronic* is activated, e. g. for cooling
sliders of the air vents to the centre detent its contents. The level of airflow depends on
position. the airflow and air distribution settings.
! Close the glove compartment air vent
Setting the centre air vents
when heating mode is activated. At high
outside temperatures, open the air vent
and activate the "cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function. Otherwise, tempera-
ture-sensitive items stored in the glove
compartment could be damaged.
: Centre air vent, left

; Centre air vent, right
= Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right
? Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =

: Air vent thumbwheel
and ? up or down.
; Air vent
Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :

clockwise or anti-clockwise.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 124

Setting the rear-compartment air vents X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out. The automatic control is deactivated
and the air distribution is controlled
according to the selected setting.
Controls
Setting the airflow

: Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
vents lock.
; Rear-compartment air vent, right X To increase/reduce: press the K or
= Rear control panel for 3-zone I button.

Thermotronic*
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
Switching the Mono function on/off
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or You can use the mono function to adopt the
down. temperature and air distribution settings on
the driver's side for the front-passenger side.
X Press button º.
Setting the air distribution
The indicator lamp in the º button lights
3-zone Thermotronic*: you can set the air up or goes out.
distribution individually for the driver's and
front-passenger sides.
¯ directs the airflow through the demis- Demisting the windscreen
ter vents
i You should only select the "demisting"
P directs the airflow through the centre function until the windscreen is clear again.
and side air vents
O directs the airflow through the footwell X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
air vents lock.
S directs the airflow through the centre X To activate: press the ¬ button.
and side air vents as well as the foot- The indicator lamp in button ¬ lights up.
well air vents The system automatically switches to the
_ directs the airflow to the entire vehicle following functions:
interior Rcooling with air dehumidification on
b directs the airflow through the centre Rhigh airflow25
and side air vents as well as the demis-
ter vents Rhigh temperature25
a directs the airflow through the footwell
and demister vents
25 Depending on the outside temperature.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 125

Rair distribution to the windscreen and Switching the rear window heating
front side windows on/off
Rair-recirculation mode off
G Risk of accident
X To switch off: press the ¬ button. Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could
out. The previously selected settings come endanger you and others.
into effect again. The cooling with air dehu-
Controls
midification function remains on. Air-recir- i The rear window heating has a high cur-
culation mode remains deactivated. rent draw. You should therefore switch it
or off as soon as the window is clear, as it only
X Press button Ã. switches off automatically after several
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes minutes.
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
automatic mode.
window heating may switch off.
or
X Turn thumbwheels : or D clockwise or X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
anti-clockwise (Y page 118),(Y page 120). lock.
X Press the ¯ button.
or
The indicator lamp in the ¯ button lights
X Press the K or I button.
up or goes out.
Demisting the windows

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-
Windows misted up on the inside tion mode
X Activate the "cooling function with air dehu- You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
midification" function. unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
X Activate the automatic mode. from outside. The air already inside the vehi-
cle will then be recirculated.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
the "demisting" function. G Risk of accident
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
Windows misted up on the outside briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
X Activate the windscreen wipers. ing visibility and endangering yourself and
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the others. This may prevent you from observing
O or P symbol appears in the dis- the traffic conditions, thereby causing an
play. accident.
i You should only select this setting until X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
the windscreen is clear again. lock.
X To activate: press the , button.
The indicator lamp in the , button
comes on.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 126

i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- X Convenience closing: press and hold

matically at high outside temperatures. the , button until the side windows and
When air-recirculation mode is activated the panorama sliding sunroof* have
automatically, the indicator lamp in closed.
the , button is not lit. The indicator lamp in the , button
Outside air is added after about 30 comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activa-
minutes. ted.
Convenience opening: press and hold
Controls
X To deactivate: press the , button. X
The indicator lamp in the , button goes the , button until the side windows and
out. the panorama sliding sunroof* have
reached their original position.
i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto- The indicator lamp in the , button goes
matically: out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- i If you open the side windows or the pan-
side temperatures below approximately
orama sliding sunroof* manually after clos-
5†
ing with the convenience closing feature,
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool- they will remain in this position when
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- opened using the convenience opening fea-
ted ture.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
side temperatures above approximately
5† Switching the residual heat on/off
The residual heat function is only available in
Convenience opening/closing vehicles featuring 3-zone Thermotronic*.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
G Risk of injury
of the engine to continue heating the station-
Make sure that nobody can become trapped ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
between the side window and the door frame engine has been switched off. The heating
as the side windows are opened and closed. time depends on the set interior temperature.
Do not place objects or lean against the side
windows when they are being opened or i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
closed. You or the objects could be drawn in less of the airflow setting.
or become trapped between the side window
and the door frame as the window moves. If i If you activate the "residual heat" function
there is a risk of entrapment, press at high temperatures, only the ventilation
the , button again. Press the button for will be activated. The blower runs at
stopping, opening or closing the side windows medium speed.
in the opposite direction as appropriate. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
Make sure that nobody can become trapped lock or remove it.
as the panorama sliding sunroof* is opened X To activate: press the T button.
and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, The indicator lamp in the T button lights
press the , button again. Press the button up.
for stopping, opening or closing the panorama
sliding sunroof* in the opposite direction as
appropriate.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 127

Sliding sunroof 127
X To deactivate: press the T button. minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle

The indicator lamp in the T button goes interior. Change the position of the sliding
out. sunroof or open a side window slightly to
reduce or eliminate these noises.
i The residual heat automatically switches
off after around 30 minutes or if: i Related topics:
Rthe ignition is switched on Rconvenience opening from the outside
Rthe
(Y page 82) or from the inside
battery voltage drops
Controls
(Y page 126)
Rconvenience closing from the outside
Sliding sunroof (Y page 82) or from the inside
(Y page 126)
General notes Rautomatic closing of the sliding sunroof
G Risk of injury (PRE-SAFE) (Y page 40)
when closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a
risk of entrapment, release the switch and Panorama sliding sunroof*
push it briefly in any direction to stop the slid-
ing sunroof.
G Risk of injury
Children could injure themselves if they oper-
ate the sliding sunroof.
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.
G Risk of injury : To open

The glass in the panorama sunroof could ; To close/lower
break in an accident. If you are not wearing a = To raise
seat belt, there is a risk that you could be
thrown through the opening in the event of the X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a lock.
seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding
direction.
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal- i If you press the switch beyond the point
functions may occur. of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
ing process is started in the corresponding
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
direction. You can stop automatic opera-
sliding sunroof. The seals could otherwise
tion by pressing again.
be damaged.
i When the sliding sunroof is open, apart

from the normal airflow noises resonance
noises may also occur. They are caused by
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 128

128 Sliding sunroof
Closing with increased force and with- feature, it opens again slightly. The rain
out the anti-entrapment feature closing feature is then deactivated.
G Risk of injury The panorama sliding sunroof does not close

if:
You could be severely or even fatally injured
Rit is raised at the rear
when closing the panorama sliding sunroof
with increased closing force or if the anti- Rit is blocked
entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
Controls
that nobody can become trapped when clos- screen being monitored by the rain sensor
ing the panorama sliding sunroof. (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
or in a carport)
If the panorama sliding sunroof blocks during
closing:
X Immediately after the panorama sliding Roller sunblinds for the panorama
sunroof blocks, pull the switch again to the sliding sunroof*
point of resistance in the direction of
arrow ; until the panorama sliding sun- The roller sunblinds provide protection from
roof is closed. the sun. The two roller sunblinds can only be
The panorama sliding sunroof is closed opened and closed together when the pano-
with more force. rama sliding sunroof is closed.
If the panorama sliding sunroof blocks during G Risk of injury
closing again: Make sure that nobody can become trapped
X Immediately after the panorama sliding as you open or close the roller sunblinds.
sunroof blocks, pull the switch again to the
point of resistance in the direction of
arrow ; until the panorama sliding sun-
roof is closed.
The panorama sliding sunroof is closed
without the anti-entrapment feature.
Rain closing feature*

When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sun-
roof closes automatically: : To open
Rif it starts to rain
; To close
Rat extreme outside temperatures = To open
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
lock.
The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding
at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the direction.
vehicle interior.
i If you press the switch beyond the point
i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstruc- of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
ted when being closed by the rain closing
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 129

Loading and stowing 129
ing process is started in the corresponding Loading and stowing

direction. You can stop automatic opera-
tion by pressing again. Loading guidelines
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof cle depend on the distribution of the load
and the roller sunblinds within the vehicle. You should therefore load
Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the your vehicle as shown in the illustrations.
roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sun-
Controls
roof or the roller sunblinds do not open
smoothly.
lock.
X Pull the switch to the point of resistance in
the direction of arrow ; until the roller
sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Press the switch to the point of resistance Observe the following notes when transport-
in the direction of arrow : and hold it until ing a load:
the roller sunblinds are fully open. Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
X Press the switch to the point of resistance maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
in the direction of arrow : and hold it until or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle
the panorama sliding sunroof has opened (including occupants).
about 10 cm. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards and as
X Pull the switch repeatedly to the point of
low down in the luggage compartment as
resistance in the direction of arrow ; until possible.
the panorama sliding sunroof is fully
Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
closed.
edge of the backrests.
X Keep the switch pulled for an additional
Ralways place the load against the front or
second.
X Check whether the panorama sliding sun-
rear seat backrests.
roof can be opened fully again Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
(Y page 127). seats if possible.
X If this is not the case, consult a qualified Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
specialist workshop. wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp
edges for protection.
Stowage compartments
G Risk of injury
The stowage compartments must be closed
when items are stored in them. Luggage nets
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 130

130 Loading and stowing
are not designed to secure heavy items of X To lock: insert the emergency key element
luggage. (Y page 213) into the lock and turn it 90°
You or other vehicle occupants could be clockwise to position 2.
injured by objects being thrown around if you: X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-
Rbrake sharply ment (Y page 213) into the lock and turn
it 90° anti-clockwise to position 1.
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident i Vehicles with audio equipment* or
Controls
COMAND APS*: the AUX jack is in the glove

Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be
compartment.
placed in the luggage net.
Do not place hard objects in the map pockets.
Stowage compartment/telephone
Objects must not protrude from the map
compartment under the armrest
pockets.
Glove compartment
X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-

hand button :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To open: pull handle : and open glove
compartment lid ;. i A small and a large stowage compartment
X To close: fold glove compartment are located under the armrest. The small
cover ; up until it engages. stowage compartment can be removed for
emptying. The telephone bracket* is loca-
ted in the large stowage compartment.
Stowage compartment under the driv-

er's and front-passenger seat (only
vehicles with electric seats*)
G Risk of injury
Only load the stowage compartment with the
maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Other-
wise, the transported load could, for example,
be thrown out of the stowage compartment if
you change direction suddenly or brake
sharply and could injure you or others.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 131

Only use the cup holders for containers of a

suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise,
the drinks could spill.
Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks.
Otherwise, you may scald yourself.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
Controls
X To open: pull handle : up and fold
cover ; forwards.
Stowage compartment in the rear seat

armrest
X To open: fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Lift the cover of the rear seat armrest.
X Press release button :.
Cup holder ; folds out to the front.
X If necessary, tilt the cover of the rear seat
armrest back down again.
X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-
rest.
X Fold down rear seat armrest ;. X Fold cup holder ; back until it engages.
X Fold cover : of the rear seat armrest
upwards.
Luggage net in the front-passenger
footwell
Cup holder
G Risk of injury
G Risk of injury Only place lightweight objects in the luggage
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants edged or fragile objects. The luggage net can-
could be injured by objects being thrown not secure the objects sufficiently in the event
around if you: of an accident.
Rbrake sharply

Rare involved in an accident
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 132

Enlarging the luggage compartment X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-

dle ; of the rear seat backrest forwards.
The left and right sides of the rear seat back-
Corresponding rear seat backrest : is
rest can be folded down to increase the lug-
unlocked.
gage compartment capacity.
X Fold rear seat backrest : forwards.
G Risk of injury X If necessary, move the driver's or front-
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the passenger seat back.
vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless
Controls
they are secured.

Folding the rear seat backrest back
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
When using the luggage compartment
enlargement, you should always clip in the
safety net*, if at hand.
G Risk of poisoning
Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte- : Rear seat backrest
rior.
; Lock verification indicator
= Rear seat backrest release handle
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
X If necessary, move the driver's or front-
passenger seat forward.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X Swing rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
Red lock verification indicator ; is no lon-
ger visible.
! Before folding the rear seat backrest for-
G Risk of injury
wards, make sure that the head restraints
are pushed in (lowest detent). Otherwise, Make sure that the backrest is correctly
the front seats, the armrests and the Rear- locked in position. The red lock verification
Seat Entertainment System* could be dam- indicators on the left and right sides should
aged. no longer be visible. If they are visible, the
backrests are not locked in position.
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head Occupants could otherwise be injured in the
restraints (Y page 64). event of an accident, e.g. by objects being
passenger seat forward.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 133

thrown forwards through the vehicle interior

from the luggage compartment.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 64).
passenger seat back.
Controls
Securing a load
Lashing eyelets : Lashing eyelets in the luggage compart-
ment
G Risk of injury
Use only the intended lashing eyelets; on no
account should you use the child-seat anchor-
age points on the rear seat backrest.
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
evenly.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rare involved in an accident : Lashing eyelets* in the rear-compartment
Please observe the loading guidelines. footwell
Observe the following points or guidelines

when securing loads: Luggage compartment cover*
Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure The luggage compartment cover is not a
a load, as these are only intended as an restraint system. Secure the load under the
anti-slip protection for light loads. luggage compartment cover by suitable
Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp means. Make sure that the luggage compart-
edges or corners. ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is
RPad
not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over
sharp edges for protection.
the backrest into the passenger compartment
There are four lashing eyelets in the luggage during, for instance, heavy braking, sudden
compartment and two in the rear-compart- changes of direction or in the event of an
ment footwells*. accident. You could cause an accident or
cause injury to yourself and others.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the luggage
compartment higher than the lower edge of
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 134

the side windows. Do not place heavy X To remove: make sure that luggage com-
objects on top of the luggage compartment partment cover : is rolled up.
cover. X Push the handle on the right underside in
the direction of arrow ; or to the left.
Extending and rolling up the luggage X Remove luggage compartment cover :.
compartment cover
X To fit: position luggage compartment
cover : in the recess on the left-hand side
Controls
when viewed in the direction of travel.

X Press the handle in the opposite direction
to the arrow.
X Allow luggage compartment cover : to
engage in the appropriate recess on the
right-hand side.
Safety net*
X To extend: pull luggage compartment G Risk of injury
cover : back and clip it into the retainers
You must make sure that the safety net is
on the left and right-hand sides.
correctly secured at the top and bottom.
X To roll up: unclip luggage compartment
Do not use a damaged safety net.
cover : and guide it forwards until it is
The safety net cannot restrain heavy loads.
completely rolled up.
For this reason, you should always secure the
i You can fold up the solid section of the load.
luggage compartment cover approximately Otherwise, objects that have not been
45° to facilitate loading the luggage com- secured sufficiently might be thrown around
partment. if you brake suddenly, change direction sud-
denly or are involved in an accident, and could
Fitting/removing the luggage compart- cause you an injury.
ment cover
RPosition 1 behind the front seat (with

luggage compartment enlargement)
(Y page 132): the retainers behind B-pil-
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 135

lar : and the lashing eyelets* in the foot- Tightening the safety net
well of the rear seat (Y page 133) are
required for tightening the net.
You can only use the safety net in position
1 if there are lashing eyelets* in the foot-
well of the rear seat.
RPosition 2 behind the rear seat: the
Controls
retainers behind C-pillar ; and the lashing
eyelets in the luggage compartment are
required for tightening the net
(Y page 133).
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
Preparing the safety net
X Insert belt hook : into lashing eyelet ;
The safety net is located in the loading tray in in the direction of the arrow.
the stowage well under the luggage compart- X Pull tensioning strap = by the loose end in
ment floor (Y page 136).
the direction of the arrow until the safety
X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the net is tight.
safety net. X After driving a short distance, check the
X Unroll and unfold the safety net. tension of the safety net and retighten it if
The upper and lower guide rods must necessary.
engage audibly.
Releasing the safety net
Attaching the safety net
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats

Guide rod inserted behind the C-pillar
X Pull belt adjuster : upwards in the direc-
X Insert guide rod ; into retainer : in the tion of the arrow to reduce the tension on
direction of the arrow. the tensioning strap.
X Slide guide rod ; forwards into X Unhook belt hook ; from lashing eyelet
retainer : in the direction of the arrow. =.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 136

Detaching and storing the safety net

X Unhook guide rod ; from
holder : (Y page 135).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
guide rods.
X Fold the safety net and roll it up. Roll the
belt adjuster and belt hook into the safety
Controls
net to prevent noise.

X Put the safety net in the loading tray in the
stowage well under the luggage compart-
: Bag hook (D-pillar)
ment floor.
Coat hooks on the tailgate

G Risk of injury
The tailgate may close if too great a load is
placed on the coat hooks.
This could cause you or others to be trapped
and injured.
If you use the coat hooks, only hang light
clothing on them. Make sure that nobody can
become trapped.
X Pull both Velcro fasteners ; through slots
= in loading tray : and fasten the safety
net.
Bag hook
G Risk of injury
Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do
not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged
or fragile objects. When braking sharply,
changing direction quickly or in the event of
: Coat hooks
an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the
items sufficiently, This could result in injury to
yourself or others.
Stowage well under the luggage com-
partment floor
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. G Risk of injury
Never drive with the luggage compartment
There is one bag hook on the left side wall in floor open.
the luggage compartment and there are two Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
hooks on the right and left of the lower D- could be injured by objects being thrown
pillar, e.g. for tension belts.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 137

Features 137
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak- Roof rack system*
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent. G Risk of accident and injury
An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or
The safety net*, the ball coupling*, the col- load could become detached from the vehi-
lapsible spare tyre* etc. are stowed beneath cle. These objects may be thrown around and
the luggage compartment floor. can injure you or others, or cause an accident.
Follow the roof rack/ski rack manufacturer's
Controls
installation instructions and special instruc-
tions for use.
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof
load of 75 kg. Always adapt your driving style
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather
conditions and drive with particular care if the
roof is laden.
X To open: open the tailgate. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down- only use roof rack systems which have
wards ;. been tested and approved for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent dam-
Handle : folds upwards.
age to the vehicle.
X Swing the luggage compartment floor
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
upwards using handle : until it rests
way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
against the luggage compartment cover. age even when it is in motion.
i A hook with a strap is attached to the Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
underside of the luggage compartment equipment, you can raise the panorama
floor. This hook can be used to attach the sliding sunroof* fully and open the tailgate
luggage compartment floor to the roof for fully.
easier loading and unloading of the stow-
age well beneath the luggage compartment X Secure the roof rack to the roof rails*.
floor. The hook is a loading aid only, as the
stowage well beneath the luggage com- Observe the manufacturer's installation
partment floor must be closed while driv- instructions.
ing.
X To close: fold the luggage compartment Features
floor down.
X Press the luggage compartment floor Sun visors
down ; until it engages.
G Risk of accident
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
while driving. Otherwise, you could be daz-
zled, impairing your view of traffic conditions.
As a result, you could cause an accident.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 138

138 Features
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it

engages.
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by
the ribbing at the sides and lift it up and
out ;.
X To refit the insert: press insert = into the
holder until it engages.
Controls
X To close: press cover : briefly at the

front.
The cover moves back.
: Mirror light
; Bracket Ashtray in the rear compartment
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
Vehicles without 3-zone Thermotronic* and a
? Vanity mirror
rear-seat entertainment system* have an
A Mirror cover ashtray in the centre console in the rear com-
partment.
Mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor from retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.

Ashtray* (vehicles with ashtray and X To remove the insert: press release but-
cigarette lighter*) ton = then pull the insert upwards and
remove it.
Ashtray in the cockpit X To refit the insert: press insert : into the
holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter* (vehicles with ash-

tray and cigarette lighter*)
G Risk of injury and fire
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.
Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
cle are not able to injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 139

Features 139
An additional socket is fitted in the centre

console on vehicles without an ashtray with
cigarette lighter*.
Controls
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Slide cover : forwards until it engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati- engages.
cally when the heating element is red-hot. X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front.
12 V sockets The cover moves back.
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. Socket in the rear passenger compart-
ment*
Dashboard socket*
A socket is fitted in the centre console in the
The socket is installed in vehicles with audio rear compartment in vehicles with an ashtray
equipment* or COMAND APS*. and a cigarette lighter*.
X Open the glove compartment X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
(Y page 130). X Lift up the cover of socket :.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 140

140 Features
Socket in the luggage compartment mutual influences between the vehicle elec-
tronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz
recommends the use of an approved exterior
aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec-
tromagnetic fields generated by a wireless
device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field
strength within the vehicle interior is lower
than in a vehicle that does not have an exte-
Controls
rior aerial.
i There are various mobile phone brackets
that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some
cases, these are country-specific. You can
X Lift up the cover of socket :. obtain these mobile phone brackets from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mobile phone* The functions and services available when
you use the phone depend on your mobile
G Risk of accident phone model and service provider.
Observe the legal requirements of the country
Inserting the mobile phone
in which you are currently driving regarding
operating mobile communications equipment X Open the telephone compartment
in a vehicle. (Y page 130).
If it is permitted by law to operate communi- X Place the mobile phone bracket into the
cations equipment while the vehicle is in pre-installed fitting; see the separate
motion, you may only do so when the traffic mobile phone bracket fitting instructions.
situation allows. Otherwise, you could be dis- X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an phone bracket; see the separate mobile
accident and injure yourself and others. phone bracket fitting instructions.
Two-way radios and fax equipment used with- If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter- phone bracket, you can speak to the person
fere with the vehicle's electronics and, you are calling using the hands-free system.
thereby, jeopardise the operating safety of You can operate the telephone using the
the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you 6 and ~ buttons on the multi-function
must only use this equipment if it is correctly steering wheel*. You can operate other
connected to a separate, reflection-free, exte- mobile phone functions via the on-board com-
rior aerial. puter (Y page 99).
G Risk of injury When you take the key out of the ignition lock,
the mobile phone stays on but you can no
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
longer use the hands-free system.
cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into If you are making a call and you would like to
account current scientific discussions relat- take the key out of the ignition lock, first
ing to the possible health risk posed by elec- remove the mobile phone from the bracket.
tromagnetic fields. Otherwise, the call will be ended.
To ensure optimum reception quality for

mobile phones in the vehicle, and to minimise
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 141

Features 141
Floormat* on the driver's side

G Risk of accident
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are used,
and that the floormats are properly secured.
The floormats must be correctly secured at all
times using retainers and press-studs.
Controls
Before you drive off check the floormats and
secure if necessary. A floormat which is not
properly secured can slip and, thereby, inter-
fere with the movement of the pedals.
Do not place floormats on top of one another.
X Slide seat backwards.

X To fit: place the floormat in position.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull floormat off retainers ;.

X Remove the floormat.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 142

142
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 143

143
Running-in notes ............................... 144

Refuelling ........................................... 144
Engine compartment ........................ 146
Tyres and wheels .............................. 150
Winter driving ................................... 155
Driving tips ........................................ 156
Off-road driving ................................. 158
Driving abroad ................................... 162
Operation
Trailer towing* .................................. 162
Service ............................................... 167
Care .................................................... 167
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 144

144 Refuelling
Running-in notes Refuelling

The first 1,500 km Refuelling
G Risk of accident G Risk of explosion
New brake pads/linings only have optimal Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
braking performance after several hundred and smoking are therefore prohibited when
kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by handling fuels.
applying greater force to the brake pedal. This Switch off the engine before refuelling.
also applies when brake pads/linings or
brake discs have been changed. G Risk of injury
Operation
Avoid any contact with fuels.

If you treat the engine with sufficient care
from the very start, you will be rewarded with You can damage your health if your skin
excellent performance for the remainder of comes into direct contact with fuel or if you
the engine's life. inhale fuel vapours.
RTherefore, you should drive at varying road
G Risk of fire
and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.
Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- sel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This
tle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of causes damage to the fuel system and engine
the maximum permissible engine speed for and could result in the vehicle catching fire.
each gear.
RChange gear in good time. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small
to brake. quantity of the wrong fuel will damage the
Rtry to avoid depressing the accelerator injection system. Damage resulting from
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the
down). warranty.
Ronly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving,
! Do not start the engine if you accidentally
e.g. in mountainous terrain.
refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the
After 1,500 km, you can continuously fuel could enter the fuel lines. This would
increase the engine speed and bring the vehi- require draining of the fuel tank and fuel
cle up to full road speed. lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
i You should also observe these notes on and have the fuel tank and fuel lines
running in if the engine or the axle gear on drained completely.
your vehicle has been replaced. When you open or close the vehicle with the
key, the fuel filler flap is automatically
unlocked or locked.
The position of the fuel filler cap is to the rear
on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap
is displayed in the instrument cluster 8.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 145

Refuelling 145
The arrow next to the filling pump indicates Petrol (EN 228)
the side of the vehicle.
! Refuel using only unleaded premium
grade petrol with a minimum octane num-
ber of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to
European standard EN 228.
Otherwise, you could impair engine output
or damage the engine.
i As a temporary measure, only when the

recommended fuel is not available, you
Operation
may also use regular unleaded petrol,
91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce
: To open the fuel filler flap engine performance and increase fuel con-
sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle.
; To insert the fuel cap
In some countries, the quality of the avail-
= Tyre pressure table
able petrol may not be adequate and could
? Fuel type cause coking around the inlet valve. In such
X To open: press the fuel filler flap in the cases, and in consultation with a
direction of arrow :. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
A000989254510). You must observe the
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and notes and mixing ratios specified on the
remove it. container.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 245) .
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. Diesel (EN 590, DIN 51628)
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the G Risk of fire
fuel system. Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn sel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This
would damage the fuel system and engine and
it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly
could result in a vehicle fire.
engages.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
! Refuel using only diesel which conforms
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: if the fuel to European standard EN 590 or German
tank has been run completely dry, it will be standard DIN 51628.
necessary to bleed the fuel system Otherwise, you could impair engine output
(Y page 206). or damage the engine.
! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par-

ticulate filter in countries outside the EU,
only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than
0.005 percent sulphur content by weight
(50 ppm) should be used.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 146

146 Engine compartment
! In countries in which diesel with a higher amount of flow improver to the fuel corre-
sulphur content is available (e.g. 0.035 per- sponding to the outside temperature.
cent by weight), the engine oil should be Mix the additive with the diesel in good time,
renewed at more frequent intervals. More before the flow properties of the diesel
information about intervals for changing become inadequate. Otherwise, malfunctions
the engine oil can be obtained from any can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated
garage.
! The use of fuels which do not meet the
requirements of EN 590 or German stand- Flow improver
ard DIN 51628 can cause increased wear, The effectiveness of a flow improver is not
Operation
and damage the engine and the exhaust guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the infor-
system. mation provided by the manufacturer when
Do not use the following: using a flow improver. Only use flow improv-
Rmarine
ers that have been tested and approved by
diesel
Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further infor-
Rheating oil mation from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Rbio-diesel Centre.
Rvegetable oil
Rpetrol Engine compartment
Rparaffin
Bonnet
Rkerosene
G Risk of accident
Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
not use any special additives (exception:
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open
flow improvers – see "Low outside temper-
up and block your view.
atures").
Damage caused by the use of unapproved Opening
fuels or additives is not covered by the war-
ranty. G Risk of injury
Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 245) . There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
even if the engine is not running.
Low outside temperatures Some engine components can become very
hot.
The flow properties of diesel may be inade-
quate at low ambient temperatures. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Owner’s Manual
To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel
and observe the relevant safety notes.
with improved cold flow qualities is available
during the winter months. Your vehicle must G Risk of injury
be refuelled with winter diesel at tempera-
The radiator fan between the radiator and the
tures of – 5 † or below.
engine can start automatically, even if the key
You can use winter diesel at temperatures has been removed from the ignition lock. For
down to about – 20 † without any problems. this reason, you must not reach into the fan
If only "summer diesel" or less cold-resistant rotation area. Otherwise, you could be
"winter diesel" (e.g. in Mediterranean injured.
regions) is available, you should add an
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 147

Engine compartment 147
Vehicles with a petrol engine: The bonnet release lever is located in the
The electronic ignition system uses high volt- driver's footwell.
age. For this reason, you must never touch
components of the ignition system (ignition
coil, ignition cable, spark plug connector or
test socket) when:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe engine is being started.
Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
is being cranked by hand.
Operation
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
X Pull bonnet release lever :.
The electronic injection control uses high volt- The bonnet is released.
age. Therefore, never touch fuel injection sys- ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers
tem components when: are not folded away from the windscreen.
Rthe engine is running. Otherwise, you could damage the wind-
Rthe engine is being started. screen wipers or the bonnet.
Rthe ignition is switched on. The handle for opening the bonnet is located
above the radiator grille.
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are

switched off.
G Risk of injury
The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage
could be set in motion.
When the bonnet is open, you or others could
be injured by the wiper rods.
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off and that the key has been pulled X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-
out of the ignition lock before opening the dle ; up and lift the bonnet.
bonnet.
Closing
G Risk of injury
as you close the bonnet.
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a

height of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 148

148 Engine compartment
i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is

not properly engaged. Open it again and
close it with a little more force.
Engine oil
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes up to 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil
consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
Operation
high engine speeds. Example: vehicles with a diesel engine

Further information on engine oil
(Y page 246).
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick
tube.
Checking the engine oil level X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Insert oil dipstick : into the oil dipstick
When doing so:
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
Rthe vehicle should be parked on level The oil level is correct if the level is between
ground. minimum mark = and maximum
Rthe engine should be switched off for at mark ;.
least five minutes if the engine is at normal X Top up the oil if necessary.
operating temperature.
Rthe engine should be switched off for at Topping up the engine oil
least 30 minutes if the engine is not at
operating temperature (i.e. if you only start H Environmental note
the engine briefly). When topping up the oil, take care not to spill
any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into
the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be
damaging the environment.
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine
Example: vehicles with a petrol/diesel engine

X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
X Top up with the amount of oil required .
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 149

Engine compartment 149
i The difference in quantity between the The coolant expansion tank is located in the
minimum mark and maximum mark is engine compartment on the right when
approximately 2 litres. viewed in the direction of travel.
! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil

is added and the oil level is above the max-
imum mark on the dipstick, the engine or
catalytic converter could be damaged.
Have excess oil siphoned off.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and
Operation
tighten clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
For further information on engine oil, see
(Y page 246). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
Coolant remove it.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle There is sufficient coolant in expansion
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled tank ; if the coolant is level with marker
down. bar = in the filler neck when cold or
approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot.
X Top up the coolant if necessary.
the ignition lock.
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in X Replace cap : and tighten all the way to
the multi-function display. the stop.

For further information on coolant, see
G Risk of injury (Y page 247).
The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore,
only unscrew the cap once the engine has
cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge Windscreen washer system/head-
must display less than 70 †. Otherwise, you lamp cleaning system*
could be scalded by escaping hot coolant.
The washer fluid reservoir for the windscreen
washer system and headlamp cleaning sys-
tem* is located in the engine compartment
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 150

150 Tyres and wheels
on the left-hand side when viewed in the Tyres and wheels

direction of travel.
Points to remember
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tyres and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle. These tyres have been specially adap-
ted for use with the control systems, such
as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
Operation
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
If you use other tyres and wheels,

Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any respon-
i Add windscreen washer concentrate to sibility for damage that may result from
the washer fluid all year round. this. Further information about tyres,
G Risk of fire wheels and approved combinations can be
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable.
Centre.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibi-
ted when handling washer fluid concentrate. If you use tyres other than those tested and
recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
! Only use windscreen washer fluid which cles, characteristics such as handling, vehi-
cle noise emissions and fuel consumption
is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit-
may be adversely affected. In addition, the
able windscreen washer fluid could dam-
wheels may come into contact with the
age the plastic lamp lenses of the head-
body or axle components when heavily loa-
lamps.
ded or when driving with snow chains. This
X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con- could result in damage to the tyres or the
tainer beforehand. vehicle.
X At temperatures below freezing:
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of
water and windscreen washer concentrate recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
(e.g. MB SummerFit). previous damage cannot always be detec-
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
X At temperatures below freezing:
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
water, antifreeze additive and windscreen fit used tyres if you have no information
washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). about their previous usage.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem-
peratures. G Risk of accident
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
vehicle or are not used as they should be, can
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck impair driving safety. As a result, you could
until it clicks into place. cause an accident. Before purchasing and
using them, enquire about their suitability,
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 151

Tyres and wheels 151
legal stipulations and factory recommenda- width of the tyre (Y page 152). If neces-
tions at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
Modification work on the brake system and surface.
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
lidates the General Operating Permit for the
fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre
vehicle.
pressure monitoring systems) other than
the standard valve cap or other valve caps
Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-
tyres
Operation
cle.
ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type RYou should regularly check the pressure of
and make. all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips,
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the and correct the pressure as necessary
wheels. (Y page 152).
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
erate speeds for the first 100 km as they Notes on driving
only reach their full performance after this RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
distance. noises and unusual handling characteris-
RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
tyres of the same size are required on the cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.
front and rear wheels. If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat- reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as
est, regardless of wear. This also applies to soon as possible to check the wheels and
tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage
the spare wheel*.
could also be causing the unusual handling
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
characteristics. If you find no signs of dam-
tread depth, as this significantly reduces age, have the wheels and tyres examined
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). at a specialist workshop, for example at a
! Store tyres that are not being used in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and die- the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb
sel. or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva-
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse
and tyres angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the
sidewalls, could get damaged.
RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
res, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation,
cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at
least every 14 days, as well as after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged
wheels could cause a loss of tyre pressure.
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the whole
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 152

Direction of rotation G Risk of accident

Tyres with a specified direction of rotation Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk has a negative effect on the vehicle’s driving
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- safety, which could lead you to cause an acci-
efits if the correct direction of rotation is dent. Therefore, you should regularly check
observed. the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates
essary.
its correct direction of rotation.
i An emergency spare wheel* may also be To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure
gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
Operation
fitted against the direction of rotation.

not permit any reliable conclusion about the
tyre pressure.
Tyre tread G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:
Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies.
Bear in mind that:
Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. valve is leaking.
Thus, you should replace tyres that have Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved
insufficient tread. by Mercedes-Benz has been fitted on the
Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tyre valve.
tread depth is 4 mm or less as they will no Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative
longer provide adequate grip. effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which
Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. could lead to your causing an accident.
Thus, you should regularly check the tread
depth and the condition of the tread across
If possible, you should only correct tyre pres-
the entire width of all tyres. If necessary,
sures when the tyres are cold. Depending on
turn the steering wheel so that you can see
the ambient temperature, the speed you are
the tyre tread more easily.
driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre
temperature and thus the tyre pressure may
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi- change by approximately 0.1 bar per 10 °C.
cle and cause an accident due to the reduced Take this into account when checking the
grip of the tyres on the road. pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if
it is too low for the current operating condi-
tions.
Tyre pressures Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or
i You will find a table of tyre pressures for too low can:
various operating conditions on the inside Rshorten the service life of the tyres
of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Rincrease the likelihood of tyre damage
The valid value for the "Minispare" emer- Rhave a negative effect on handling charac-
gency spare wheel* is stated on the spare
teristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning)
wheel and in the technical data section.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 153

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-

H Environmental note
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least nering at high speeds or driving with high
every 14 days. rates of acceleration)
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
Tyre pressure loss warning vehicle or on the roof)
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of ing system
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
Operation
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed
if you have:
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
Rchanged the tyre pressure
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multi-function dis- Rchanged the wheels or tyres
play. Rfitted new wheels or tyres
G Risk of accident X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
The tyre pressure loss warning system does pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres- to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler tyres is set correctly for the operating con-
flap will help you decide whether the tyre ditions concerned.
pressures should be corrected. X Also observe the notes in the section on
The tyre pressure loss warning system does tyre pressures (Y page 152).
not replace the need to regularly check your
vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of G Risk of accident
pressure on several tyres at the same time The tyre pressure loss warning system can
cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss only give reliable warnings if you have set the
warning system. correct tyre pressure.
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the incorrect values will be monitored.
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in
In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring vehicle instability when driving, thus increas-
the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do ing the risk of an accident.
not make any sudden steering movements
when doing so. Configuring using the multi-function
steering wheel
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
system is limited or delayed if: the ignition lock.
Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
X Press è to select Tyre pressure
tyres
menu: R.
Rroad conditions are wintry X Press the í button.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel The following appears in the multi-function
display: RFI active Reactivate: R
X Press the í button.
The following appears in the multi-function
display: Tyre press. OK?
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 154

Yes+ Cancel- X Press $ or % to select Cancel.

To confirm the restart of the tyre pressure X Press #.
loss warning system: The previous settings will not be changed.
X Press the + button.
display: Run Flat Indicator restar- Interchanging the wheels
ted.
G Risk of accident
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
Interchange the front and rear wheels only if
loss warning system will monitor the set
they have the same dimensions: for example
tyre pressures of all four tyres.
Operation
size, offset, etc.

or
After every wheel interchange/change, have
To cancel the restart of the tyre pressure the tightening torque checked at a qualified
loss warning system: specialist workshop that has the necessary
X Press the - button. specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
The previous settings will not be changed. the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Configuring with the luxury multi-func- Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
tion steering wheel* relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
the ignition lock. cialist workshop.
X Press the ( or & button to select the The wheels could work loose if they are not
Service menu. tightened to a torque of 150 Nm.
X Press the $ or % button to select For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Tyre pressure. mends that you only use wheel bolts of the
correct size which have been approved for
X Press #.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
display: Run Flat Indicator active The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
Restart with OK differ, depending on the operating conditions.
X Press #. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear
The following appears in the multi-function pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres
display: Tyre press. now OK? typically wear more on the shoulders and the
rear tyres in the centre.
To confirm the restart of the tyre pressure
loss warning system: Interchange the wheels every 5,000 km to
10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre
X Press $ or % to select Yes. wear, provided that the vehicle has the same
X Press #. size front and rear tyres. Do not reverse the
The following appears in the multi-function direction of tyre rotation.
display: Run Flat Indicator restarted Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
loss warning system will monitor the set is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,
tyre pressures of all four tyres. if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
or warning system.
To cancel the restart of the tyre pressure
loss warning system:
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 155

Winter driving 155
Winter driving X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 152).

X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
Points to remember tem (Y page 153).
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz G Risk of accident
Service Centre, at the onset of winter. If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with
winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability
will be impaired owing to unstable cornering
Winter tyres characteristics caused by the different tyres.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
In temperatures below +7 °C, always use all- and drive carefully.
Operation
weather tyres or winter tyres and always use
Have the spare wheel* replaced at the near-
winter tyres in wintry road conditions.
est qualified specialist workshop which has
Only winter tyres displaying the snowflake the necessary specialist knowledge and tools
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
vide optimum grip in wintry road conditions. Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
Only these tyres will allow the ABS and ESP Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In par-
driving systems to function optimally in win- ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-
ter, as these tyres have been designed spe- related systems must be carried out at a quali-
cifically for driving on snow. fied specialist workshop.
Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
acteristics. Snow chains
G Risk of accident For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than mends that you only use snow chains which
4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are have been specially approved for your vehicle
no longer suitable for winter use and can no by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
longer provide sufficient grip. This could standard of quality.
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
cause an accident. the following points in mind:
Always observe the maximum permissible Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/
speed specified for the winter tyres you have tyre combinations.
fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emer-
lower maximum permissible speed than that gency wheels, e.g. a collapsible emergency
of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning spare wheel.
sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be RFit snow chains only in pairs and only to the
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop,
rear wheels. Comply with the manufactur-
e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
er's installation instructions.
Under these circumstances, you should also
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle Do not exceed the maximum permissible
using permanent Speedtronic*26 to the max- speed of 50 km/h.
imum permissible speed for the winter tyres i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
(Y page 110). pulling away with snow chains fitted
Once you have fitted the winter tyres: (Y page 52). This way, you can allow the
26 Only available for certain countries.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 156

156 Driving tips
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- G Risk of accident

ieving an increased driving force (cutting Make sure that other road users are not
action). endangered by your braking.
Downhill gradients
Winter driving
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
G Risk of accident cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- you must select shift range 1, 2 or3 in good
ing on a slippery road surface. This could time.
Operation
the vehicle could skid. i This also applies if you have activated
cruise control* or Speedtronic*.
You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
This will use the braking effect of the engine,
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
so less braking will be required to maintain
tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be system and prevents the brakes from over-
stopped when moving at low speed: heating and wearing too quickly. If you need
X Shift the selector lever to N. additional braking, depress the brake pedal
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by repeatedly rather than continuously.
using corrective steering.
Heavy and light loads
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Driving tips load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
Rolling with the engine switched off drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident
Never switch the engine off while the vehicle
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
is in motion.
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
There is no power assistance for the steering the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
and the service brake when the engine is not pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
running. to overheat, increases the braking distance
You will require considerably more effort to and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
steer and brake and you could therefore lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident. If the brakes have been used only moderately,
you should occasionally test their effective-
ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
Braking higher speed. This improves the grip of the
brakes.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine Wet roads
If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period
of time without braking, there may be a
the vehicle could skid.
delayed reaction from the brakes when brak-
ing for the first time. You must brake harder.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 157

Driving tips 157
You must therefore maintain a greater dis- ing effect is reached, you should compensate
tance from the vehicle in front. for the reduced braking effect by applying
After driving on a wet surface, brake firmly greater pressure when braking. This also
while paying attention to the traffic condi- applies after the brake discs or the brake
tions. This way the brake discs will become pads/linings have been replaced.
warm, drying more quickly, which will protect
them against corrosion.
Tyre grip
Limited braking performance on salted
roads G Risk of accident
While the vehicle can be fully controlled at a
Operation
G Risk of accident certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the same road safety. Otherwise, you could cause
braking effect, resulting in a significantly lon- an accident.
ger braking distance, which could lead to an Pay particular attention to the road conditions
accident. at temperatures around freezing point.
To avoid this danger, you should: If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g.
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put- from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on
ting other road users at risk, when you are the ice when you brake, considerably reduc-
driving on salted roads. This helps to ing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such
remove any salt that may have started to weather conditions.
build up on the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle Driving on wet roads
ahead and drive with particular care. If water has accumulated to a certain depth
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
trip and immediately after commencing a planing occurring, even if:
new trip, so that salt residues are removed Ryou drive at low speeds
from the brake disc. Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth
For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and
New brake pads/linings brake carefully.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
fitted to your vehicle which have been Driving on flooded roads
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or If you have to drive on stretches of road on
which correspond to an equivalent quality which water has collected, please bear in
standard. Brake pads/linings which have not mind that:
been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is
which are not of an equivalent quality could
30 cm.
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
G Risk of accident pace.
New brake pads/linings only reach their opti-
mum braking effect after several hundred kil- ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
ometres of driving. Before this optimum brak- front or in the opposite direction create
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 158

waves. This may cause the maximum per- Read this section before driving your vehicle
missible water depth to be exceeded. off-road. Practise by travelling over more gen-
Failure to observe these notes may result tle off-road terrain first.
in damage to the engine, electrical systems The following driving systems are specially
and transmission. adapted to off-road driving:
ROff-road drive program* (Y page 107)
ROff-road ABS (Y page 51)

Off-road driving
ROff-road 4-ETS (Y page 53)
Points to remember
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 54)
Off-road driving is only possible when the off-
Operation
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

road engineering package* (Y page 107) is
fitted. (Y page 105)
G Risk of accident
Drive slowly in rough terrain with which you Off-road driving
are unfamiliar. This will allow you to detect
unexpected obstacles more easily and, there- G Risk of accident
fore, to reduce the risk of an accident. Damage to the vehicle creates the risk of an
Do not make U-turns on mountain roads. Oth- accident for yourself and other road users. If
erwise, the vehicle could tip over. If a slope is in doubt, have your vehicle checked at a quali-
too steep for the vehicle, drive back in reverse fied specialist workshop which has the nec-
gear. essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
Do not drive at an angle up steep inclines.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Otherwise, the vehicle could tip over. If you
Service Centre for this purpose.
drive up a steep incline at an angle and the
vehicle threatens to overturn, steer into the H Environmental note
line of fall immediately.
Protection of the environment is of primary
Never allow the vehicle to roll backwards. The importance. Treat nature with respect.
braking effect of the engine cannot be utilised Observe all prohibiting signs.
in neutral. If you only use the service brake,
you could lose control of the vehicle.
General information
G Risk of accident RStop your vehicle and, if necessary, select
Grains of sand, particles of dirt and other the off-road drive program* (Y page 107)
abrasive materials can enter the brake sys- before driving off-road.
tem. This can lead to excessive wear and Rsuitable for the off-road terrain. Make sure
unpredictable braking efficiency. there is always sufficient ground clearance
After the brakes have been exposed to dirty to prevent damage to the vehicle.
conditions, have them checked and cleaned
RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise,
stowed safely and are well secured
there is a risk that braking power may be
(Y page 133).
insufficient in the event of an emergency, or RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
that braking efficiency may be unpredictable. when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-
vate DSR.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 159

RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a X Deactivate DSR (Y page 105).

walking pace. X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
REnsure that the wheels are in contact with check for damage.
the ground at all times. X Clean the front and rear licence plates.
RDrive with extreme care on unknown off- X Clean the wheels/tyres with a water jet and
road routes where visibility is poor. For remove any foreign objects.
safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first X Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the
and survey the off-road route. vehicle underside with a water jet; check
RCheck the depth of water before fording for foreign objects and damage.
rivers and streams. X Check whether twigs or other parts of
Operation
RLook out for obstacles such as rocks, holes,
plants have become trapped. These
increase the risk of fire and can damage
tree stumps and furrows.
fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-
RAlways keep the side windows and the pan- lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.
orama sliding sunroof* closed during the X After the trip, examine without fail the
journey. entire undercarriage, wheels, tyres, brakes,
RDo not stray from marked routes or paths. bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
exhaust system for damage.
i Information about retrofitting special all- X After driving for extended periods across
terrain tyres is available from any sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
Checklist before driving off-road and cleaned.
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
top it up if necessary. travel, check for foreign objects in the
X Vehicle toolkit: check that the jack is wheels and drive train and remove them if
working and make sure you have the wheel- necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
brace, a robust tow cable and a folding balance and cause vibrations.
spade in the vehicle.
X Wheels and tyres: check the tyre tread
depth and tyre pressure. Travelling uphill
X Check for damage and remove foreign Approach/departure angle
objects, e.g. small stones, from the
wheels/tyres.
X Replace any missing valve caps.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
Checklist after driving off-road

Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on nor-
mal roads. After driving off-road, check the
vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident
Front approach/departure angle : is maxi-
to yourself and other road users.
mum 23° and rear approach/departure
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 160

angle ; is maximum 25° when the vehicle is Make use of the vehicle’s own impetus to
loaded and ready to drive. travel over the brow.
Loaded and ready to drive means: a full tank, This style of driving prevents:
all fluids topped up and the driver is in the Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
vehicle. brow of a hill
RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes Rloss of traction
and steep gradients.
Rthe vehicle from travelling too quickly down
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-
the other side
hill gradients, select the off-road drive pro-
gram*.
Driving downhill
Operation
RObserve the warnings for off-road driving

RDrive slowly.
(Y page 158).
RDo not drive at an angle down steep
RDrive slowly.
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
RAccelerate gently and make sure that the with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-
wheels are gripping. erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip
RAvoid high engine speeds, except when and overturn.
driving on sandy and muddy routes with RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,
high driving resistance. select shift range 1.
RSelect a shift range appropriate to the gra- RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
dient. gently. When doing so, make sure that the
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
select shift range 1. of fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
i Depress the brake pedal when stopping
on steep uphill gradients. Hill start assist after a long downhill stretch.
will aid you when you pull away again i Off-road ABS is activated when the off-
(Y page 84). road drive program* is selected.
At speeds below 30 km/h, the front wheels
Maximum gradient-climbing capability lock cyclically during braking. The digging-
On good road surfaces, 70% of the maximum in effect achieved in the process reduces
gradient-climbing capability is available. the stopping distance when driving off-
road. The steerability of the vehicle is con-
i If the load on the front axle is reduced
siderably reduced when the wheels lock.
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
4ETS recognises this and brakes the Driving over obstacles
wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased and it is easier to pull away. Observe the following rules when driving over
tree stumps, large stones and other obsta-
Brow of hill cles:
RSelect the off-road drive pro-
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
gram* (Y page 107).
reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi-
ately before reaching the brow of the hill. RAvoid high engine speeds.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 161

RSelect shift range 1. damage the engine and neighbouring

RDrive very slowly. assemblies.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
RAs far as possible, try to drive straight over
the centre of obstacles, front wheel first, the water.
then rear wheel. RDo not stop.
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the ! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask while fording. Otherwise, water could get
passengers for guidance when driving over into the vehicle interior and damage the
large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle vehicle’s electronics and interior equip-
ment.
Operation
always increases the risk of an accident.
RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
and the ground is slippery and in some
Fording cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
dangerous to pull away in the water.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive.
RClean any mud from the tyre tread after
crossing a ford.
RApply the brakes to dry them after crossing
a ford.
Driving on sand
Water depth : must not exceed 30 cm when
Observe the following rules when driving on
the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive. sand:
Loaded and ready to drive means: a full tank, RSelect a shift range appropriate to the ter-
all fluids topped up and the driver is in the rain.
vehicle.
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
! The depth of water must not exceed ance. The vehicle could otherwise dig itself
30 cm. Note that the possible water depth into the sand.
is less in flowing water.
RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles, if pos-
REstablish how deep the water is and the sible. Make sure that the ruts are not too
characteristics of the body of water before deep, that the sand is firm enough and that
fording. your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-
RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2. ance.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
at a steady walking pace.
! Under no circumstances should you
accelerate before entering the water. The
bow wave could cause water to enter and
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 162

162 Trailer towing*
Ruts G Risk of accident

Observe the following rules when driving Remember to set the headlamps back to
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with asymmetrical dipped beam when you return
loose gravel: to driving on the same side of the road as that
of the country in which your vehicle was reg-
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and istered. You may otherwise dazzle the oncom-
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. ing traffic and could cause an accident.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged
or bottom out and get stuck.
RSelect the off-road drive program* Trailer towing*
Operation
(Y page 107).
Fitting the ball coupling
RAvoid high engine speeds.
X Make a note of the ball coupling key num-
RSelect shift range 1. ber.
RDrive slowly.
i You can use this number to obtain a
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the replacement key from a Mercedes-Benz
wheels on one side on the middle section Service Centre.
of turf if possible.
G Risk of injury
If the ball coupling does not engage correctly
Driving abroad when it is mounted, the vehicle/trailer com-
bination is not secured and the trailer could
Points to remember come loose. This could cause an accident. Fit
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network the ball coupling carefully and make sure that
is also available in other countries. The it engages in position correctly.
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
The detachable ball coupling is located in the
for use when you are abroad are to be found
stowage well under the luggage compartment
in the "Service24h" chapter of the Service
floor (Y page 136).
Booklet.
X Take the ball coupling and the key from the
Only low-octane fuel is available in certain
stowage well under the luggage compart-
countries.
ment floor.
You can find further information about fuel
grades on (Y page 144).
Symmetrical dipped beam

If your journey takes you to countries where
vehicles are driven on sides of the road oppo-
site to the country in which the vehicle is reg-
istered, your headlamps must be switched to
symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic
will be dazzled less.
X Have the headlamps switched over at a
qualified specialist workshop, e. g. a
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 163

Trailer towing* 163
X Pull protective cap : down in the direction

of the arrow out of the ball coupling recess.
X Place protective cap : into the ball cou-
pling recess.
Operation
X Turn key : to the stop in the direction of
the arrow to lock.
X Remove key :.
X Press protective cap ; onto the lock.
X Pull protective cap ; off the lock in the i You can store the key in the ball coupling
handwheel. stowage compartment in the luggage com-
X Insert key : into the ignition lock. partment.
The red mark on the handwheel must be
aligned with the green area on the ball cou-
pling (fitting position). If this is not the case:
X Turn key : in the direction of the arrow.
The key is released.
X Fold trailer power socket : down.
G Risk of accident
The ball coupling is only securely mounted
when the green mark on the handwheel is
X Pull handwheel ? away from the ball cou- aligned with the green area on the ball cou-
pling and turn it clockwise until it engages. pling and the key can be removed. If the ball
The green area on the ball coupling is coupling is not securely mounted, it may
aligned with the red mark on the hand- come loose.
wheel. The ball coupling must be locked and the key
X Insert the ball coupling in the direction of must be removed when towing a trailer. This
the arrow into ball coupling recess = until is the only way to guarantee that the ball cou-
it engages. pling is secured and cannot come loose while
Handwheel ? turns so that green mark the vehicle is in motion. If the ball coupling
A on the handwheel is aligned with green cannot be locked and the key cannot be
area B on the ball coupling.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 164

164 Trailer towing*
removed, remove the ball coupling and clean You will find installation dimensions and loads
it. in the "Technical data" section
If the ball coupling can still not be fitted (Y page 253).
(locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the The maximum drawbar load of the trailer
ball coupling. The trailer coupling must then drawbar on the ball coupling is 80 kg. How-
not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation ever, the actual noseweight must not exceed
is not guaranteed. the value given on the trailer coupling and
Have the entire trailer coupling checked at a trailer identification plates. The lowest weight
qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes- applies.
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes- ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to
Operation
Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In par- the maximum permissible noseweight. Do
ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety- not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg,
related systems must be carried out at a quali- otherwise the trailer may come loose.
fied specialist workshop. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear
axle load are reduced by the actual nose-
weight.
Notes on towing a trailer
i The height of the ball coupling changes
G Risk of accident with the load of the vehicle. If necessary,
When reversing the vehicle towards the use a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer
trailer, make sure there is nobody between drawbar.
the trailer and the vehicle.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If Coupling up a trailer
you do not couple the trailer to the towing
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become G Risk of injury
detached. Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
Make sure that the following values are not overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
exceeded: become trapped between the bumper and
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight trailer drawbar.
Rthe permissible trailer load ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an

Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
vehicle vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle ing of the overrun brake.
weight of both the towing vehicle and the X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
trailer
X Couple up the trailer.
You will find the applicable permissible val- X Establish the electrical connection
ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi- between the vehicle and the trailer.
cle documents.
You will find the values approved by the man- Driving tips
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates
and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech- i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi-
nical data" section. lisation (Y page 53).
In Germany, the maximum permitted speed
for vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 165

Trailer towing* 165
G Risk of accident Driving tips

A maximum speed of 80 km/h should not be RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
exceeded, even in countries where higher cle in front than when driving without a
speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer com- trailer.
binations. This lowers the risk of an accident. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
characteristics will be different in comparison
to when driving without a trailer. RThe values given for gradient-climbing
The vehicle/trailer combination: capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
Operation
Ris heavier
note that the power output of the engine,
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
ent-climbing capability climbing capability, decrease with increas-
Rhas an increased braking distance ing altitude.
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds If the trailer swings from side to side:
Rdemands X Do not accelerate.
more sensitive steering
X Do not counter-steer.
Rconsumes more fuel
X Brake if necessary.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. G Risk of accident
i This also applies if you have activated On no account should you attempt to draw the
cruise control* or Speedtronic*. vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing
speed.
This will use the braking effect of the engine,
so less braking will be required to maintain
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake
Removing the ball coupling
system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need X Pull the protective cap off the lock in the
additional braking, depress the brake pedal handwheel.
repeatedly rather than continuously. X Insert the key into the lock in the hand-
wheel.
G Risk of accident
X Turn the key clockwise.
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause The lock is unlocked.
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight X Hold the ball coupling. Pull the handwheel
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system away from the ball coupling and turn it
to overheat, increases the braking distance clockwise until it engages.
and can lead to the brakes failing completely. The green area on the ball coupling is
aligned with the red mark on the hand-
wheel.
X Pull out the ball coupling downwards.
X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
X Open the stowage well under the luggage
compartment floor.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 166

166 Trailer towing*
X Remove the protective cap from the ball X To switch the connected power supply
coupling recess. on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
X Press the protective cap into the ball cou- to position 2 or 0, respectively.
pling recess until it engages.
X Store the ball coupling with the key inser-
ted in the ball coupling recess. Trailer with 7-pin connector
X Fold the trailer power socket upwards. If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
G Risk of accident coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained
Operation
interior if it is not secured. at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a

Otherwise, you and others could be injured by Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the ball coupling being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply Fitting the adapter
Rare involved in an accident
Trailer power supply

When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
trailer socket outlet is equipped with a per-
manent power supply and a power supply that
is switched on via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9. X Open the socket cover.
The power supply that is switched on via the X Insert connector with lug : into
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin groove ; on the socket and turn the con-
10. nector clockwise to the stop.
! You can connect consumers with a power X Make the cover engage.
rating of up to 240 W to the permanent X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
power supply and up to 180 W to the power the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
supply that is switched on via the ignition
lock. ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot become
You must not charge a trailer battery using
detached when cornering.
the power supply.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
The trailer's turn signal lamps are only guar-
anteed to function when bulbs are used.
You can obtain further information about
installing the trailer electrics from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 167

Care 167
Service Service A overdue by .. km
ASSYST PLUS service interval display i If you fail to have the service performed
by the specified date, you may be violating
The ASSYST PLUS service indicator tells you applicable laws. Your warranty may be inva-
when the next service is due. lidated and goodwill settlements may be
The service due date is shown in the multi- refused.
function display, for example:
Next service A in .. days Calling up a service due date
Next service A in ... km
Multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons)
Service A due
Operation
X Switch on the ignition.
The letter indicates which service is due. A
X Use V to select the Service menu.
stands for a minor service and B for a major
service. A number or another letter may be
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function
displayed after the letter. This figure indicates
steering wheel*(12 buttons)
any necessary additional maintenance work
to be performed. If you report this displayed X Switch on the ignition.
information to a qualified specialist work- X Press the = or ; button to select the
shop, for example a Mercedes-Benz Service Service menu.
Centre, they can inform you of the costs the X Press the 9 or : button to select the
service will incur. ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with
The ASSYST PLUS service interval indicator a.
does not take into account any periods of The multi-function display shows the
time during which the battery is disconnec- service due date.
ted. Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
X Note down the service due date displayed Care
before disconnecting the battery.
Notes on care
or
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods Regular and proper care maintains the value
from the service date shown on the display of your vehicle.
after reconnecting the battery. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
products.
Hiding a service message Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
X Multi-function steering wheel (4 but- by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
tons): press C. quate care cannot always be completely
X Luxury multi-function steering
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop immediately, e.g. a
wheel*(12 buttons): press % or
a.
Remove the following types of dirt immedi-
ately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
Service overdue
Soak:
A display message is shown in the multi-func- Rinsect remains with insect remover
tion display, for example:
Rbird droppings with water
Service A overdue by ... days
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 168

168 Care
and rinse off the treated surface afterwards. ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
Remove: suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in
Rtree
the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is
resin, oils, fuels and greases by rub-
washed. There is otherwise a risk of dam-
bing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
age to the exterior mirrors.
leum ether or lighter fluid.
Rtar stain with tar remover ! Make sure that the automatic transmis-
Rwax with silicone remover sion is not in position P when washing your
vehicle in a tow-through car wash.
! Do not affix to painted surfaces or plastic Do not remove the key from the ignition
surfaces: lock. Do not open the driver's or front-
Operation
Rstickers passenger door when the engine is

switched off, as this automatically shifts
Rfilms
the automatic transmission to park posi-
Rmagnetic plates tion P and locks the wheels, unless you
Rscented oil bottles or similar items have previously shifted the automatic
transmission to N.
Otherwise, you could damage the paint fin-
ish or plastic. ! Make sure that the side windows are com-
H Environmental note pletely closed, that the ventilation/heater
blower is fully turned off and that the wind-
Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths
screen wiper switch is set to 0. Otherwise,
and polishing wads in an environmentally
the rain sensor may be activated, triggering
responsible manner.
unintended wiper movements. This could
cause damage to the vehicle.
Vehicle care After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax and drying agents from the windscreen
! Do not park the vehicle for a long period and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears
of time directly after cleaning, especially if and reduce wiping noises caused by residue
the wheels have just been cleaned with a on the windscreen.
wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
rapid corrosion of the brake discs and High-pressure cleaners
brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park
the vehicle when it is at normal operating G Risk of accident
temperature. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your
Automatic car wash vehicle, in particular the tyres. Otherwise, you
could damage the tyres and cause an acci-
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
dent.
wash from the beginning.
! Do not use a touch-free automatic car ! Observe the instructions issued by the
wash that uses chemical agents to wash equipment manufacturer concerning the
the vehicle. distance to be maintained between the
Preferably use automatic car washes without nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the
brushes. vehicle (at least 30 cm).
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. around when cleaning your vehicle.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 169

Care 169
Do not aim directly at any of the following: X Carefully wipe down the wiper blades using
Rtyres a clean, damp cloth.
X Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen
Rdoor joint
before switching on the ignition.
Relectrical components
Rbattery Cleaning the windscreen/windows
Rconnectors
! When cleaning the inside of the wind-
Rlights screen, rear and side windows, do not use:
Rseals Rdry cloths
Operation
Rtrim elements Rabrasive cleaning agents
Damaged seals or electrical components Rsolvents
can lead to failures or leaks. Rcleaning agents containing solvent
Clean the inside of the windscreen, rear
Cleaning the wiper blades and the out-
and side windows using a damp cloth and
side of the windscreen
commercially-available glass cleaner.
G Risk of injury Avoid touching the inside of the rear win-
Before cleaning the windscreen or wiper dow and the side windows with hard
blades, turn the key in the ignition to 0. Oth- objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. Other-
erwise, the windscreen wipers may move and wise, you could cause damage to the rear
injure you. window heating or the aerial in the rear
window and the side windows.
! Do not clean the wiper blades too often i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of
as this will result in damage to the graphite the rear or side windows could interfere
coating. This could cause wiper noise. with radio or mobile phone reception, espe-
X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 61)in the cially if it is conductive or metal-coated
ignition lock. film. Information about anti-glare film can
X Set the windscreen wipers to position °
be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
(Y page 79) on the combination switch.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 61) or
Cleaning the headlamps
remove it when the wiper arms are vertical.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the headlamps
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away with a damp sponge.
from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
wise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- could damage the plastic lenses of the
screen. headlamps.
X Clean the windscreen.
Do not use the following:
i To clean the windscreen, it is recommen- Rdry cloths
ded that Mercedes-Benz cleaning products Rabrasive cleaning agents
are used.
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvent
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 170

170 Care
Otherwise, you could scratch or damage Cleaning the steering wheel boss and
the surface of the lenses. dashboard
X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water.
Cleaning the panorama sliding sun-
X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard.
roof*
X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent.
A protective film is laminated to the rear glass
element of the panorama sliding sunroof. G Risk of injury
! Do not use any of the following to clean Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit and
the protective film:
steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing sol-
Operation
Rdry cloths vents cause the surface to become porous

Rabrasive cleaning agents and in the event of an airbag being triggered,
Rsolvents
plastic parts that have become loose could
cause considerable injuries.
Rcleaning agents containing solvent
Do not touch the protective film with hard Cleaning the COMAND display
objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. Other-
wise, you could scratch or damage the sur-
X When cleaning the display, make sure that
face of the protective film. it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display's surface with a conven-
Cleaning the plastic trim tional micro-fibre cloth and cleaning agent
for TFT/LCD displays.
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and X Dry the display's surface with a dry micro-
do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam- fibre cloth.
age the surfaces.
! Never use any of the following:
! Ensure that cosmetics and suntan lotion Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol
do not come into contact with the vehicle's Rabrasive cleaning agents
trim. This will protect the vehicle's high-
quality trim and help retain its overall Rconventional household cleaning agents
appearance. These can damage the display's surface.
X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free Do not press the display's surface during
cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). cleaning: this could lead to irreversible
damage.
X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g.
a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water.
Cleaning the seat covers
X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is
solvent-free and non-corrosive. Mercedes- ! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean
Benz recommends that you use a genuine leather and artificial leather cov-
Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this ers, as it is too aggressive and, if used
purpose. often, may damage the cover.
! You should clean:

Rgenuine leather covers using a damp
cloth, then wipe the covers down using a
dry cloth. Make sure that the leather
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 171

Care 171
does not become soaked. For leather ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
care, use leather care foam A 001 986 alkaline-based cleaning agents such as
59 71 10. You can purchase this from any wheel cleaner.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Use the chrome-cleaning agent recommen-
Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois- ded by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Infor-
tened with a solution containing 1% mation about chrome-cleaning agents can
detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid). be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Rfabric
Service Centre.
covers with a microfibre cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid). When Cleaning Parktronic*
Operation
cleaning, take care not to rub too vigo- The sensors are located in the front and rear
rously and always wipe entire seat sec- bumpers.
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
i Note that leather covers are a natural

product and, as such, are subject to a nat-
ural ageing process and may react differ-
ently (e.g. increased wrinkling) to certain
environmental influences (such as high
humidity, intense heat).
Note that regular care is essential to ensure The sensors are located in the front and rear
that the quality (both appearance and com- bumpers.
fort) of the covers is retained over time.
Cleaning the wooden trim*and trim

strips
X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water.
X Clean the wooden trim.
X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent.
! Do not use cleaning agents containing

solvents because these can damage the
wooden trim.
X Clean sensors : in the bumper with water,
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Impurities combined with the effects of road ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
grit and corrosive environmental factors may do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or
cause flash rust to form on the surface. damage the sensors. If you intend to use a
Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to
ensure that their original shine is restored. clean the sensors, observe the instructions
issued by the equipment manufacturer
concerning the distance to be maintained
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 172

172 Care
between the nozzle of the high-pressure

cleaner and the vehicle.
Cleaning the reversing camera*

Operation
: Guide pin
; Locking balls
= Guide faces
? Release lever
A Ball neck head
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :. X Lightly oil or grease positions : to A and
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area the ball coupling recess of the vehicle after
around the reversing camera with: cleaning.
X Treat the lock with an oil that is acid and
Rhigh-pressure cleaning equipment
resin-free.
Ra dry cloth and a lot of pressure X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is
Raggressive cleaning agents working properly.
Otherwise, you could damage the reversing ! Observe the note on care provided by the
camera. trailer manufacturer.
Trailer coupling* i Maintenance of the ball coupling and

trailer coupling can also be performed by
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
becomes dirty or corroded.
X Remove any rust using a wire brush. H Environmental note
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
a brush. ronmentally-responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-

pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 173

173
Where will I find...? ........................... 174

Display messages ............................. 176
Troubleshooting ................................ 199
Locking/unlocking in an emer-
gency ................................................. 213
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
head restraints .................................. 215
Changing the batteries ..................... 216
Changing bulbs ................................. 217
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 220
Flat tyre ............................................. 222
Practical advice
Battery ............................................... 232
Jump-starting .................................... 234
Towing and tow-starting .................. 236
Fuses .................................................. 238
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 174

174 Where will I find...?
Where will I find...? X Fold feet = down and out to the side.
X Pull side reflectors ; up to form a triangle
Where will I find...?
and lock them at the top using press-
Warning triangle stud :.
The warning triangle is located behind the
right-hand trim panel in the rear of the lug- First-aid kit
gage compartment. i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit
annually, and replace the contents when
necessary.
The first-aid kit is located in the luggage net
on the left-hand side at the rear of the boot.
Practical advice
X Turn release button : 90° in the direction

of the arrow and remove warning triangle.
X Remove first-aid kit : from the luggage

net.
Fire extinguisher*
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every two years.
Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
X Remove warning triangle ;. tries concerned.
Setting up the warning triangle
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 175

Where will I find...? 175
The fire extinguisher is located underneath tailgate is opened or closed) and you could be
the front of the driver's seat. seriously injured.
i When using the jack, you should also

observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre"
section (Y page 222).
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Practical advice
X Pull tab : upwards.
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
Vehicle tool kit, jack, TIREFIT kit and

collapsible spare wheel*
: Wheel wrench
The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit and jack can ; Towing eye
be found on the left-hand side (when viewed
in the direction of travel) of the stowage well = Jack
under the luggage compartment floor. ? Folding wheel chock
X Open the stowage well under the luggage A Electric air pump
compartment floor (Y page 136). B TIREFIT kit (behind the left-hand side pan-
elling)
G Risk of injury
The jack is designed only to raise and hold the Vehicles with collapsible emergency
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being spare wheel*
changed.
You must use axle stands if you are carrying
out work on the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden
blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.
Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve
its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Do not start the engine at any time while a
wheel is being changed. Example
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise the X Remove stowage well :.
vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
(e.g. if the engine is started or if a door or the
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 176

176 Display messages
Remove the collapsible emergency spare Display messages

wheel
Notes
The on-board computer shows warnings or
malfunctions in the multi-function display.
Certain display messages are accompanied
by a warning tone or a continuous tone.
The multi-function display shows high-priority
display messages in red. In the following
tables, these display messages are printed in
red.
Please respond in accordance with the dis-
play messages and follow the additional
Practical advice
Example
notes in this Owner's Manual.
X Remove collapsible emergency spare
wheel :. Vehicles with a multi-function steering
wheel (4 buttons)
Setting up the foldable wheel chock
Use the C button on the multi-function
The folding wheel chock serves as an addi-
steering wheel to fade out low-priority mes-
tional measure for securing the vehicle
sages. You cannot fade out display messages
against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is
of the highest priority. The multi-function dis-
being changed.
play shows these messages continuously
until the causes of the messages have been
remedied.
The on-board computer saves certain display
messages. Calling up display messages
(Y page 92).
For some display messages, the + symbol
appears in the multi-function display. More
detailed information on these display mes-
sages can be found below under "Text mes-
sages" or "Symbol messages".
X Fold both plates : upwards.
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function
X Fold out lower plate ;.
steering wheel*(12 buttons)
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =. Use the a or the % button on the luxury
multi-function steering wheel to fade out low-
priority messages. You cannot fade out dis-
play messages of the highest priority. The
multi-function display shows these messages
continuously until the causes of the mes-
sages have been remedied.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 177

Display messages 177
The on-board computer saves certain display required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
messages. Calling up display messages you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
(Y page 101). this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety-related systems must be
All vehicles carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident Before starting a journey, check that the

No further messages can be displayed if the warning and indicator lamps are operating
instrument cluster and/or the multi-function correctly.
display fails. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
This means that you will not see information lock.
about the driving situation, such as the speed, All warning and indicator lamps (except for
outside temperature, warning/indicator the main-beam indicator lamp and the turn
Practical advice
lamps, display messages or system failures. signal indicator lamps) light up and the
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be multi-function display is activated.
affected. Adjust your driving style and speed The following tables contain all the display
accordingly. messages. To make it easier for you to find
Immediately consult a qualified specialist the relevant display message, the display
workshop which has the necessary specialist messages are divided into text messages
knowledge and tools to carry out the work (Y page 177) and symbol messages
(Y page 182).
Text messages
The operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised if service work is carried out improp-
erly. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Safety systems may also not
be able to protect you or others as intended.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must
have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Vehicles with a multi-function steering wheel (4 buttons): the text messages are listed
in the left-hand column under "Display messages".
Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering wheel* (12 buttons): the text messages are
listed in the right-hand column under "Display messages".
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 178

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

120 km/h 120 km/h You have exceeded the maximum speed27.
Max. Maximum X Drive more slowly.
speed. speed
exceeded
ABS and G Risk of accident
ESP inop-
erative ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The
self diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
The d warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Practical advice
ter.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above.
X On a suitable stretch of road, carefully manoeuvre the vehi-
cle slightly to the left and right at a speed above 20 km/h
until the display message disappears.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are unavailable due to undervoltage. The d
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS and G Risk of accident

ESP inop-
erative ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The d
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 179


EBV, ABS, G Risk of accident
ESP inop-
erative EBV (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,
PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are
unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, the d warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone
sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Practical advice
ESP inop- ESP inop- G Risk of accident
erative erative
see Own- ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-
er's Man- bilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The d
ual warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
ESP inop- ESP cur- G Risk of accident

erative rently
unavail. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-
See Own- bilisation are temporarily unavailable. The self diagnosis func-
er's Man- tion might not be complete, for example. The d warning
ual lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The brake sys-
tem continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above.
X On a suitable stretch of road, carefully manoeuvre the vehi-
cle slightly to the left and right at a speed above 20 km/h
until the display message disappears.
G Risk of accident
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-
bilisation are unavailable due to undervoltage. The battery
might not be charging, for example. The d warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster. The brake system
continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 180

G Risk of accident
If the display message is shown and the d warning lamp
flashes at the same time, ETS (Electronic Traction System) is
deactivated. Otherwise, the brakes on the drive wheels could
overheat.
X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disap-
pears and the d warning lamp goes out.
ETS is reactivated.
Check G Risk of accident

brake
Practical advice
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In

fluid
addition, the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster
level
lights up and a warning tone sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault.
To start To start You have attempted to start the engine and the selector lever
engine, engine, is in position D or R.
shift to P shift to X Move the selector lever to P or N.
or N either P
or N
Clean the There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained
fuel fil- off28.
ter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Top up The coolant level is too low.

coolant X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before
doing so (Y page 149).
X Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often
than usual.
28 Only for certain vehicles.

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 181


Check Tyre pres- G Risk of accident
tyres sure Check
The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signif-
tyres
icant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as
you do so.
X Check the tyres.
X Correct the tyre pressure. If necessary, set the correct tyre
pressure (Y page 152).
X If necessary, repair any defective tyres or change the wheel
Practical advice
(Y page 222).
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 153).
Run Flat Run Flat The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Indicator Indicator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
inopera- inopera-
tive tive
Check Check tyre A display message for the tyre pressure loss warning system
tyres pressures was shown.
Restart then X Set the correct tyre pressure for all tyres (Y page 152).
system restart X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
Run Flat (Y page 153).
Indicator
Key does You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
not belong X Use the correct key.
to vehicle
Close At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
doors to X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
lock veh.
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE G Risk of injury
inopera- inopera-
tive tive See Important functions of PRE-SAFE®* have failed. All other
Owner's occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 182


Child seat Child seat G Risk of injury
position in wrong
position Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-
See Own- passenger seat: the child seat is incorrectly positioned.
er's Man- X Fit the child seat in the correct position.
ual
G Risk of injury
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-
passenger seat: the child seat recognition sensor is faulty.
Practical advice
Left G Risk of injury

windowbag
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window-
malfunc-
bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
tion:wkshp
or cluster.
Right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
windowbag
malfunc-
tion:wkshp
Cruise Cruise Cruise control* and Speedtronic* are malfunctioning. A warn-
ctrl. / control ing tone also sounds.
LIM inop- and SPEED- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
erative TRONIC
inopera-
tive
Cruise Cruise A condition for activating cruise control* has not been fulfil-
control control led. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for
- - - km/h - - - km/h example.
X Activate ESP® (Y page 53)
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store
the speed (Y page 108).
Symbol messages
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 183

workshop.
7 G Risk of injury
If the symbol appears in the multi-function display, a seat belt
buckle has been released on a rear seat while driving.
X Ask occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts.
Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts* (Y page 72)
Practical advice
A The tailgate is open.
X Close the tailgate.
? G Risk of accident
Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system*: the bonnet is open.
X Close the bonnet.
; At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close the doors.
! ABS and
ESP cur-
G Risk of accident
rently ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

unavail. Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist
See Own- and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The
er's Man- self diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ual The d warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
X Carefully drive a short distance making slight steering
movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
The message goes out when ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are
available again.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 184

G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are unavailable due to undervoltage. The d
! ABS and G Risk of accident

Practical advice
ESP inop-
erative ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
See Own- stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The d
er's Man- warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
ual The brake system continues to function normally, but without
# The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds.

Possible causes are:
Ra faulty alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions and leave the engine running.
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over-
heat.
X Switch off the engine.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 185

# a with 4 The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

buttons: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check
brake wear
a with
12 buttons:
Check
brake wear
J Check
brake
G Risk of accident
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In
fluid
Practical advice
addition, the J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
level
lights up and a warning tone sounds.
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
tinue driving under any circumstances.
J a with 4
buttons:
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone
also sounds.
Release X Release the parking brake.
park.
brake
a with
12 buttons:
Release
parking
brake
J EBV, ABS,
ESP inop-
G Risk of accident
erative EBV (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,

See Own- PRE-SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are
er's Man- unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, the d warn-
ual ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone
sounds.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 186

Ã a with 4
buttons:
DSR is deactivated due to a malfunction.
X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
inopera-
tive
a with
12 buttons:
inopera-
tive
? a with 4 The coolant is too hot. In addition, the ? warning lamp in

buttons: the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.
Stop vehi- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the
Practical advice
cle Engine engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

off X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked,
a with
e.g. by slush.
12 buttons:
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting
Coolant
the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
Stop vehi-
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge.
cle Switch
engine off X If the coolant temperature increases again, visit a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
The poly-V-belt may have torn. A warning tone also sounds.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the
engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: do not start the engine
again until the display message goes out. Otherwise, there
is a risk of engine damage.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
? The engine fan is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can
continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads (e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 187

+ Top up
coolant
The coolant level is too low.
X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before
See Own- doing so (Y page 149).
er's Man- X Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified spe-
ual cialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often
than usual.
! Clean the
fuel fil-
There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained
off29.
ter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice
b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand cornering lamp* is faulty.
Left cor-
ner. light
or
Right cor-
ner. light
a with
12 buttons:
Left cor-
nering
light
or
Right cor-
nering
light
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 188

b a with 4
buttons:
The left-hand or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.
X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb (Y page 217).
Left X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
dipped
beam
or
Right
dipped
beam
a with
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Left
dipped
beam
or
Right
dipped
beam
b a with 4
buttons:
The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.
X Change the bulb.
Trailer
left turn
sig.
or
Trailer
rt. turn
sig.
a with
12 buttons:
Trailer
left turn
sig.
or
Trailer
rt. turn
sig.
b a with 4 The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

buttons: X Change the bulb.
Trailer
brake lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Trailer
brake lamp
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 189

b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

buttons: X Change the bulb.
Trailer
left tail
lamp
or
Trailer
rt. tail
lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Trailer
left tail
lamp
or
Trailer
right tail
lamp
b a with 4
buttons:
The light sensor is faulty. Daytime driving lights are switched
on.
AUTO X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch
lights (Y page 74).
inopera-
tive
a with
12 buttons:
AUTO
lights
inopera-
tive
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 190

b a with 4 The rear left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty. Vehicle

buttons: with LEDs: the display message will only be shown if all LEDs
Rear left have failed.
turn sig- X Vehicle without LEDs: replace the bulb (Y page 217).
nal Vehicle with LEDs: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
Rear right
turn sig-
nal
a with
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Rear left
turn sig-
nal
or
Rear right
turn sig-
nal
b a with 4 The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror

buttons: is faulty. The display message will only appear if all LEDs have
Left mir- failed.
ror turn X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
signal
or
Right mir-
ror turn
signal
a with
12 buttons:
Left mir-
ror turn
signal
or
Right mir-
ror turn
signal
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 191

b a with 4 The front left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty.

buttons: X Change the bulb (Y page 217).
Front left
turn sig-
nal
or
Front
right turn
signal
a with
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Front left
turn sig-
nal
or
Front
right turn
signal
b a with 4 The third brake lamp is faulty. The display message will only
buttons: appear if all LEDs have failed.
Third X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
brake lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Third
brake lamp
b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

Tail/brake
lamp, left
or
Tail/brake
lamp,
right
a with
12 buttons:
Left-hand
tail lamp/
brake lamp
or
Right-hand
tail lamp/
brake lamp
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 192

b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand main beam headlamp is faulty.

Left main
beam
or
Right main
beam
a with
12 buttons:
Left main
beam
Practical advice
or
Right main
beam
b Intell. The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. The lights remain avail-
Light Sys- able without the Intelligent Light System*.
tem inop- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
erative
b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.

Left
licence
plate lamp
or
Right
licence
plate lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Left
licence
plate lamp
or
Right
licence
plate lamp
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 193

b a with 4 The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty.

Left fog-
lamp
or
Right fog-
lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Left fog-
lamp
Practical advice
or
Right fog-
lamp
b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp is faulty.

Rear left
foglamp
or
Rear right
foglamp
a with
12 buttons:
Rear left
foglamp
or
Rear right
foglamp
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 194

b a with 4 The front left-hand or right-hand parking lamp is faulty.

Front left
parking
lamp
or
Front
right
parking
lamp
a with
Practical advice
12 buttons:
Front left
parking
lamp
or
Front
right
parking
lamp
b a with 4 The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

Left rev-
ers. lamp
or
Right rev-
ers. lamp
a with
12 buttons:
Left rev-
ers. lamp
or
Right rev-
ers. lamp
b a with 4 The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
buttons: warning tone also sounds.
Switch off X Turn the light switch to $ or c.
lights or
a with
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in
12 buttons:
to the stop.
Switch off
lights
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 195

b a with 4
buttons:
The exterior lighting is faulty.
Malfunc-
tion
a with
12 buttons:
Malfunc-
tion See
Owner's
Manual
¸ a with 4 The engine air filter must be replaced30.
Practical advice
Replace
air
cleaner
a with
12 buttons:
Replace
air
cleaner
4 a with 4 The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. A warning
buttons: tone also sounds.
Check eng. X Check the engine oil level (Y page 148).
oil level X If necessary, top up the engine oil.
a with
X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs
12 buttons:
topping up more often than usual.
Check eng.
oil lev.
when next
refuelling
+ a with 4 The key must be replaced.

You need a
new key
a with
12 buttons:
Replace
key
+ Key does You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
not belong X Use the correct key.
to vehicle
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 196

+ Close
doors to
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
lock vehi-
cle
6 a with 4
buttons:
G Risk of injury
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Malfunc-
System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instru-
tion -
ment cluster.
Workshop-
a with X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Restraint
sys. mal-
function
Consult
workshop
6 a with 4
buttons:
G Risk of injury
FL mal-
System) on the front left-hand or right-hand side. The 6
func. -
Workshop-
or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
FR mal-
func. -
Workshop-
a with
12 buttons:
Front left
malfunc-
tion Con-
sult work-
shop
or
Front
right mal-
function
Consult
workshop
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 197

6 a with 4
buttons:
G Risk of injury
RL mal-
System) in the rear* on the left-hand or right-hand side. The
func.
6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
workshop
or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
RR mal-
func. -
Workshop-
a with
12 buttons:
Practical advice
Rear left
malfunc-
tion Con-
sult work-
shop
or
Rear right
malfunc-
tion Con-
sult work-
shop
6 a with 4
buttons:
G Risk of injury
There is a malfunction in the rear centre SRS (Supplemental
R.cent.mal
Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in
f. -Work-
the instrument cluster.
shop-
a with X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
12 buttons:
Rear
centre
malfunc-
tion Con-
sult work-
shop
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 198

6 Left
windowbag
G Risk of injury
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window-
malfunc-
bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
tion Con-
cluster.
sult work-
shop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
Right
windowbag
malfunc-
tion Con-
Practical advice
sult work-
shop
C There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
7 a with 4 The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.
buttons: X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
Reserve
fuel level
a with
12 buttons:
Reserve
fuel level
¥ a with 4
buttons:
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has drop-
ped below the minimum.
Top up X Top up the windscreen washer fluid (Y page 149).
washer
fluid
a with
12 buttons:
Top up
washer
fluid
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 199

Troubleshooting 199
Troubleshooting
Points to remember
workshop.
Practical advice
Warning and indicator lamps in switches and buttons
Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

The seat heating* has The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
switched itself off pre- switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. reading lamp
switched on. or interior lighting.
When you press the Cooling has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
¿ button on the 1- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
zone automatic air con-
ditioning/2-zone auto-
matic air conditioning
Thermatic*/3-zone
intelligent automatic
air conditioning
Thermotronic*/3-zone
Thermotronic* control
panel, the indicator
lamp flashes three
times or remains off.
The cooling system
cannot be switched on.
The rear-window heat- The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
ing has switched itself switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. reading lamp
not be switched on. or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating
will switch back on automatically.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 200

200 Troubleshooting

Vehicles with auto- A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat rec-
matic child seat recog- ognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-
nition on the front- passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired.
passenger seat*:
The 45 indica- G Risk of injury
tor lamp on the centre There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The auto-
console is lit. matic child seat recognition* is malfunctioning.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
for example
Rnotebook
Practical advice
Rmobile phone
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes
If the 4 5 indicator lamp remains lit:
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 201

Troubleshooting 201
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

! The yellow ABS G Risk of accident
warning lamp
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a fault. There-
comes on while
the engine is fore, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-
running. SAFE®*, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are also
deactivated.
electronic support. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you brake
hard.
Practical advice
X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
(Y page 176).
d The yellow ESP® G Risk of accident

warning lamp
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
flashes while the
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
vehicle is in
motion. Cruise control* is switched off.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 53)

d The yellow ESP® At least one wheel is spinning and ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
warning lamp tem) is deactivated to prevent the brakes on the drive wheels
flashes while the overheating.
vehicle is in X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
motion. (Y page 176).
ETS switches back on again as soon as the brakes have cooled
down. The display message disappears and the d warning
lamp goes out.
warning lamp is
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation will not
lit while the
stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
engine is run-
ning. X Reactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 53)

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 202

202 Troubleshooting

warning lamp is
ESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction. ESP® and ESP® trailer
lit while the
stabilisation will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
engine is run-
wheel starts to spin.
ning. In addition,
a message X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
appears in the (Y page 176).
multi-function X Drive on carefully.
display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6 The red SRS G Risk of injury

Practical advice
warning lamp is
There is a malfunction in the restraint system. The airbags or belt
lit while the
tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event
engine is run-
of an accident, not be triggered at all.
ning.
J The red brake You are driving with the parking brake applied.
system warning X Release the parking brake.
lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while you are
driving. A warn-
ing tone also
sounds.
J The red brake G Risk of accident
system warning
There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
lamp comes on
while the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
is running. A attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
warning tone under any circumstances.
also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
(Y page 176).
? The red coolant The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
warning lamp faulty.
lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
coolant temper-
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
ature gauge is at
driving under any circumstances.
the start of the
scale.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 203

Troubleshooting 203

? The red coolant The coolant temperature has exceeded 130 †. The airflow to the
warning lamp radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
comes on while The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
the engine is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
running. A warn-
ing tone also
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
sounds.
X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g.
by slush.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 149). Observe the warning
notes.
Practical advice
X If necessary, top up the coolant.
X Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be
faulty.
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
; The yellow Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry.
engine diagnos- X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
tics warning Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
lamp lights up checked.
while the engine
is running.
; The yellow There may be a fault, for example
engine diagnos- Rin the engine management
tics warning
Rin the ignition system
lamp lights up
while the engine Rin the exhaust system
is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine can
run in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
7 The red seat belt The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
warning lamp to fasten their seat belts.
lights up for 6 X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 70).
seconds after
the engine starts
up31.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 204

204 Troubleshooting

7 After the engine G Risk of injury
starts, a warning
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
tone sounds for
up to 6 sec- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 70).
31
onds . The warning tone ceases.
7 The red seat belt G Risk of injury

warning lamp
The driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt.
lights up after
the engine X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 70).
starts, as soon The warning lamp goes out.
as the driver's
Practical advice
door or the G Risk of injury

front-passenger There are objects on the front-passenger seat
door is closed. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them safely.
The warning lamp goes out.
7 The red warning G Risk of injury
lamp flashes and
The driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt.
an intermittent
and you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven
audible warning
faster than 25 km/h.
sounds.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 70).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat and you are driving
faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them safely.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
8 The yellow The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.
engine diagnos- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
tics warning
lamp lights up
while the engine
is running.

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 205

Troubleshooting 205
Warning tones

The anti-theft warning You have opened the vehicle with the anti-theft alarm system still
alarm* is triggered. activated*.
X Switch off the alarm (Y page 55).
You hear a warning A message appears in the multi-function display.

tone. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 176).
You are driving with the parking brake applied.

X Release the parking brake.
Practical advice
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to $ or c.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to
the stop.
G Risk of injury
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 70).
Accident

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of fire
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank has been damaged. The leaking fuel
creates a risk of fire or explosion.
X Switch off the ignition immediately.
X Remove the ignition key.
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking
fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
You are unable to X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

determine the extent of
the damage.
You cannot detect any X Start the engine as normal.
damage.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 206

206 Troubleshooting

The NECK-PRO head Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision.
restraints on the driv- X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints (Y page 215).
er's and the front-pas-
senger's seats have
been triggered.
Fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
Practical advice
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock imme-
diately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not released.
not be opened. or
The key batteries are discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 213).
X Open the tailgate (Y page 60).
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap via the emergency release
(Y page 215).
The fuel filler flap is released, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Release the fuel filler flap by hand (Y page 215).
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 207

Troubleshooting 207

The fuel tank in a diesel There is air in the fuel system.
engine vehicle has X Fill the fuel tank (min. 5 litres).
been run completely X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key to
dry and the engine will
position 2 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock.
not start.
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key
to position 2 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock.
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
Practical advice
it runs smoothly.
If the engine still won't start after three attempts:
Engine

The engine will not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. You can hear the RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
starter motor operat-
RThe on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is
ing.
too weak or discharged.
X Turn the key back to position 0 (Y page 61)in the ignition lock
before the next starting attempt.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 83). When doing so,
remember that excessively long and frequent attempts to start
the engine will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine will not The fuel tank has been run dry.
start. You can hear the X Refuel the vehicle.
starter motor operat- X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 206).
ing. The reserve fuel
warning lamp is on and
the fuel gauge
shows 0.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 208

208 Troubleshooting

The engine will not The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too
start. You cannot hear weak or discharged.
the starter motor oper- X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 234).
ating.
If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
Practical advice
If the engine still does not start:

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical

engine: component of the engine control unit.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
ning smoothly and is X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
misfiring. workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
value above 120 †. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
The coolant warning to cool down.
lamp may also light up X
Check the coolant level (Y page 149). Observe the warning
and a warning tone may
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
sound (Y page 90).
If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The
coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suffi-
ciently.
X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop/start driving.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 209

Troubleshooting 209
Automatic transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
Practical advice
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Parktronic*

Only the red segments Parktronic has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.
in the Parktronic warn- X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified spe-
ing display are lit. You cialist workshop.
also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
Parktronic is deactiva-
ted after approximately
20 seconds and the
indicator lamp in the
Parktronic button lights
up.
Only the red segments The Parktronic sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the Parktronic warn- X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 171).
ing display are lit. Park- X
Switch the ignition back on.
tronic is deactivated
after approximately 20
seconds.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 210

210 Troubleshooting

Only the red segments The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
in the Parktronic warn- ultrasound waves.
ing display are lit. Park- X See if Parktronic functions in a different location.
tronic is deactivated
after approximately 20
seconds.
Headlamps

Practical advice
The headlamps are mis- Air humidity is very high.

ted up on the inside. X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.
The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able
to enter.
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers G Risk of accident

fail completely.
The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the centre of the wind-
screen.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 211

Troubleshooting 211
Side windows

A side window will not Objects are trapped between the window and the door frame.
close. X Remove the objects.
X Close the side window.
There are objects in the window guide rail which are preventing
the window from closing.
X Remove the objects.
X Close the side window.
Practical advice
You cannot see the cause.
X Close the side window with increased force or without the anti-
entrapment feature (Y page 81).
Mirrors

An exterior mirror has Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out elec-
been pushed out of trically:
position. X Move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*:

X Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 67) repeatedly until
you hear a distinct click.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the
mirror as usual (Y page 67).
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 212

212 Troubleshooting
Key

You cannot lock or The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close
using the key. range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 213).
X Check the key batteries (Y page 216) and replace them if nec-
essary (Y page 216).
Practical advice
The key is faulty.

X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 213).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The battery charge indi- The key batteries are discharged.

cator lamp of the key X Change the batteries (Y page 216).
does not go on during
the test.
You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or inte-
rior lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 232).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 234).
or
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 213

Locking/unlocking in an emergency 213

The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.
started using the key. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Parking up the vehicle

The vehicle is to be left Damage resulting from non-use may occur if the vehicle is parked
parked up for longer up for long periods.
Practical advice
than six weeks. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 233).
Locking/unlocking in an emergency Releasing and removing the emergency

key element
Emergency key
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the key, use the emergency
key element.
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
theft alarm system* will be triggered
(Y page 54).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X Press the % or & button on the key.
or
X Push release catch : in the direction of
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
the arrow and at the same time remove
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency emergency key element ; from the key.
key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
unlocked automatically.
Unlocking the vehicle
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-
trally with the key:
X Remove the emergency key element from
the key (Y page 213).
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 214

214 Locking/unlocking in an emergency
X Insert the emergency key element into the X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
Practical advice
X Turn the emergency key element anti- X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
clockwise to position 1. as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise.
emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and
X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it.
remove it. X Check whether the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
Locking the vehicle

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen- Opening the tailgate
trally with the key or KEYLESS GO*: If the tailgate cannot be opened, use the
X Open the driver's door. emergency release on the inside of the tail-
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear gate.
doors and the tailgate. X Take the emergency key element out of the
X Press the locking button (Y page 59). key (Y page 213).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
doors are still visible. Press the locking
knobs down manually, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
! The tailgate swings up and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 215

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints 215
X Insert emergency key element ; into Releasing the parking lock manually
opening in trim :.
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible
X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clock-
to release the selector lever lock manually to
wise. move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to
X Push emergency key element ; in the tow the vehicle away.
direction of arrow and open the tailgate.
Emergency fuel filler flap release

G Risk of injury
The edges on the inside of the vehicle body
can be sharp. You could injure yourself when
Practical advice
using the fuel filler flap emergency release.
Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of
the vehicle body.
The emergency release is located in the lug- X Depress the parking brake firmly.
gage compartment behind the side trim on X Press selector lever cover : to the left and
the right-hand side, when viewed in the direc- remove it upwards.
tion of travel. X Press release button ; down and simul-
X Open the tailgate. taneously move the selector lever out of
X Open the right-hand side trim panel position P.
(Y page 219). The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head

restraints
If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered

in an accident, you must reset the head
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
seats. Otherwise, the additional protection
will not be available in the event of another
rear-end collision. You can recognise when
X Pull emergency release :.
head restraints have been triggered by the
The fuel filler flap is unlocked. fact that they have moved forwards and can
X Open the fuel filler flap. no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre, following a rear-end col-
lision.
i This work requires a lot of strength. If you
have difficulty resetting the head
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 216

216 Changing the batteries
restraints, have this work carried out at a Key

qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Checking the batteries
X Press the & or % button.
The batteries are in order if the battery
charge indicator lamp lights up briefly.
Removing and installing batteries

You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.
Practical advice
X Push the head restraint cushion backwards

by the lower part as far as it will go ;.
X Push the head restraint cushion down into
the guide as far as it will go =.
X Firmly press back the head restraint cush-
ion until it engages :.
Changing the batteries

X Insert emergency key element : into the
Notes opening in the key and push in the direction
of the arrow.
It is advisable to have the batteries replaced
Battery tray ; is released.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Pull battery tray ; out of the key.
G Risk of poisoning
Batteries contain toxic and caustic substan-
ces. For this reason, keep batteries away from
children.
If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub-
stances.
X Remove old batteries : from the battery
Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
tray.
Service Centre, or to a special collection point X Insert the new batteries beneath the con-
for old batteries. tact spring with the positive pole facing
upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 217

Changing bulbs 217
X Push the battery tray back into the key Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth-
housing until the battery tray engages. erwise, they could damage them, for example,
X Check the function of all key buttons on the and injure themselves.
vehicle. Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode
Changing bulbs when you change them, particularly if they are
very hot. You should therefore wear eye pro-
Notes on changing bulbs
tection and gloves when you are changing
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of them.
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. G Risk of injury
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could
Practical advice
Only use the types of bulbs specified here. If get an electric shock and be seriously or even
the new bulb still does not light up, consult a fatally injured if you touch the electric con-
qualified specialist workshop. tacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with remove the cover from xenon bulbs.
your bare hands. Even minor contamination Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have
can burn into the glass surface and reduce them replaced at a qualified specialist work-
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- shop which has the necessary specialist
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb knowledge and tools to carry out the work
when fitting. required.
G Risk of injury Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
therefore allow them to cool down before you
on safety-related systems must be carried out
change them. Otherwise, you could be burned
at a qualified specialist workshop.
if you touch them.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 218

218 Changing bulbs
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs:
Halogen/bi-xenon headlamps* Bulb type
: Turn signal lamp: WY 5 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Practical advice
Tail lamp Bulb type

: Tail lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= Reversing lamp: P 21 W/W 16 W32
? Rear foglamp/tail lamp: P 21 W
Licence plate lamp Bulb type

: Licence plate lamp: W 5 W
32 Vehicle without LED* turn signal lamps (W 16 W)/vehicle with LED* turn signal lamps (P 21 W)
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 219

Changing bulbs 219
Changing the front bulbs X Push covering ; under covering =. Join

the two coverings using the tongue-and-
Turn signal lamp groove joint.
X Press covering ; until retaining lug :
engages.
Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
You must open the side trim panel in the lug-
gage compartment before you can change
Practical advice
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
X Switch off the lights.

Left-hand side trim panel
X Open the bonnet.
X Push retaining lug : in the direction of the
arrow.
X Pull covering ; forward underneath cov-
ering = and remove.
X Turn bulb holder ? or A anti-clockwise
and pull it out.
X WY 5 W: pull the bulb out of bulb
holder ?.
X PY 21 W: turn the bulb anti-clockwise,
applying slight pressure, and remove it Right-hand side trim panel
from bulb holder A.
X WY 5 W: insert new bulb into bulb X To open: turn catch : 90° in the direction
holder ?. of the arrow and remove side trim
X PY 21 W: insert the new bulb into bulb panel ;.
holder A and turn clockwise while apply-
ing slight pressure.
X Insert bulb holder ? or A and turn it
clockwise.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 220

220 Replacing the wiper blades
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into
catch : 90° in the opposite direction to the holder, turn it anti-clockwise and
the arrow. remove it from the bulb holder.
X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the
Changing the tail lamps bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly.
X Switch off the lights.
The retaining lugs on the bulb holder
X Open the luggage compartment. engages audibly.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 219). X Insert the connector.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 219).
Changing the bulbs in the licence plate

Practical advice
lamps
Bulb holder
X Pull out connector ;.
X Press retaining lugs : simultaneously in
the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb
holder out. X Switch off the lights.
X Open the tailgate.
X Press lug ; of license plate lamp : in the
direction of the arrow and remove license
plate lamp lens :.
X Remove licence plate lamp lens :.
X Replace the bulb.
X Insert licence plate lamp lens : and press
it in until it engages.
Bulb holder without LED* turn signal lamp Replacing the wiper blades
: Tail lamp/brake lamp
; Turn signal lamp Windscreen wiper blades
= Reversing lamp G Risk of accident
? Rear foglamp/tail lamp The windscreen will no longer be wiped prop-
erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 221

Replacing the wiper blades 221
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer
and autumn. on the wiper arm in the direction of the
arrow.
G Risk of accident
The wiper arms could start moving and cause Fitting
an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
switched on.
X Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer
on the wiper arm in the opposite direction
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
to the arrow.
replacing the wiper blades.
X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. screen.
Practical advice
Removing
Rear window wiper blade
! Before changing the wiper blades, always
set the wiper arms to a vertical position by G Risk of injury
using the combination switch. There is oth- The wiper arm could be set in motion and
erwise a risk of damaging the bonnet. injure you if the windscreen wipers are
switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
lock. replacing the wiper blade.
X Set the windscreen wipers to posi-
tion ° on the combination switch. Removing
X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
tical position, turn the key to position 0 and
remove it from the ignition lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
screen until it engages.
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 222

222 Flat tyre
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper X Switch off the engine.
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
it releases.
X Get out of the vehicle.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
X Close the driver's door.
X Place the warning triangle (Y page 174) at
Fitting a suitable distance. Observe legal require-
X Place the new wiper blade ; onto wiper ments.
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the Using the TIREFIT kit
arrow until it engages. You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread.
Practical advice
correctly. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures

X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
down to -20 †.
arm :. G Risk of accident
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- In the following situations, your safety is at
dow. particular risk and tyre sealant is unable to
provide breakdown assistance:
Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre
Flat tyre greater than 4 mm
Rif the wheel rim is damaged
Flat tyre equipment variants
Rif you have driven at very low tyre pressures
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
or on a flat tyre
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 175)
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
Ra collapsible emergency spare specialist workshop which has the necessary
wheel* (Y page 175) specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required.
Preparing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
as possible on solid, non-slippery, level on safety-related systems must be carried out
ground. at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Do not remove any foreign objects which
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
X Move the selector lever to P. nails.
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max.
Make sure that they are not endangered as 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump
they do so. from the stowage well underneath the lug-
X Make sure that no one is near the danger gage compartment floor (Y page 175).
area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
one who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 223

Flat tyre 223
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two

different air pumps. Version 1 can be identi-
fied by the flap, behind which the hose with
the pressure gauge and cable are located;
version 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in
the electric air pump.
Version 1
X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-

er's field of vision.
Practical advice
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
on the wheel with the defective tyre.
G Risk of injury
TIREFIT must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing.
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your X Open flap ; on the electric air pump.
eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly X Pull connector A and air pump hose B
with clean water.
from the housing.
RChange out of clothing which has come into
X Screw air pump hose B onto flange C of
contact with TIREFIT immediately.
TIREFIT filler bottle :.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doc-
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head
tor immediately. downwards into recess = of the electric
Keep TIREFIT away from children. air pump.
RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse
your mouth out thoroughly with water and
drink plenty of water.
RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
immediately.
RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can

then be removed like a layer of film.
If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty
ethylene.
tyre.
G Risk of injury
Comply with the manufacturer's safety
instructions shown on the sticker on the elec-
tric air pump.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 224

224 Flat tyre
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after

five minutes:
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or
backwards approximately 10 m.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.
X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :
from the electric pump.
X Pump up the tyre again.
G Risk of accident
X Make sure pressure release screw F on
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after
pressure gauge G is fully closed. five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.
Practical advice
X Screw filler hose D onto valve E.

X Insert plug A into the socket of the ciga- specialist workshop which has the necessary
rette lighter* (Y page 138) or into a 12 V specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
power socket in your vehicle the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
(Y page 139). mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
the ignition lock.
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
X Press on/off switch ? on the electric air cialist workshop.
pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar is
tyre is inflated. reached:
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The

X Press on/off switch ? on the electric air
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. pump to 0.
The electric air pump is switched off.
Do not switch off the electric pump dur-
X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow
ing this phase.
it away.
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
The tyre should then have a pressure of at
away.
least 1.8 bar.
X Pull away immediately.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly
longer than eight minutes at a time without around the tyre.
a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. X Stop after driving for approximately ten
The air pump can be operated again once minutes and check the tyre pressure with
it has cooled down. the electric air pump.
G Risk of accident
If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar,
the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive
any further. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 225

Flat tyre 225
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that Version 2

you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar,

correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
To reduce the tyre pressure: open pres-
sure release screw F on pressure
gauge G. X Pull connector ? and air pump hose A
Practical advice
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the from the housing.
tyre changed there. X Screw air pump hose A onto flange B of
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :.
possible at a qualified specialist workshop, X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. downwards into recess ; of the electric
G Risk of accident air pump.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
80 km/h.
The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
the driver's field of vision.
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
affected.
Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of profes-
sionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four tyre.
years at a qualified specialist workshop, X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Insert plug ? into the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter* (Y page 138) or into a 12 V
power socket in your vehicle
(Y page 139).
the ignition lock.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 226

226 Flat tyre
X Press on/off switch = on the electric air When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar is
pump to I. reached:
The electric air pump is switched on. The X Press on/off switch = on the electric air
tyre is inflated. pump to 0.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The The electric air pump is switched off.
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow
Do not switch off the electric pump dur- it away.

ing this phase. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
away.
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
X Pull away immediately.
The tyre should then have a pressure of at
least 1.8 bar. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly
around the tyre.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
Practical advice
X Stop after driving for approximately ten

longer than eight minutes at a time without minutes and check the tyre pressure with
a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. the electric air pump.
The air pump can be operated again once
it has cooled down. G Risk of accident
If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar,
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive
five minutes: any further. Consult a qualified specialist
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air workshop which has the necessary specialist
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or knowledge and tools to carry out the work
backwards approximately 10 m. required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
from the electric pump. safety or on safety-related systems must be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Pump up the tyre again.
G Risk of accident
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar,
correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 227

Flat tyre 227
To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow G Risk of accident

pressure release button E next to pres- Have the emergency spare wheel* replaced
sure gauge F. as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the workshop which has the necessary specialist
tyre changed there. knowledge and tools to carry out the work
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
possible at a qualified specialist workshop, you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
G Risk of accident carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
80 km/h. Preparing the vehicle
The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
Practical advice
X Prepare the vehicle as described
the driver's field of vision.
(Y page 222).
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be X If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
affected.
X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead posi-
H Environmental note tion.

Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of profes- X Take the following from the stowage well
sionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service beneath the luggage compartment floor:
Centre. Rthe collapsible emergency spare wheel*
Rthe wheel bolts of the collapsible emer-

X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
years at a qualified specialist workshop, gency spare wheel*
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rthe vehicle tool kit
Rthe jack
Changing a wheel/fitting the emer- X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
gency spare wheel* away.
On level ground: place chocks or similar
G Risk of accident items under the front and rear of the wheel
The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the that is diagonally opposite the wheel you
emergency spare wheel* may differ from wish to change.
those of the standard wheels.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle
will change if you fit an emergency spare
wheel*. Adapt your style of driving accord-
ingly.
You may only use the emergency spare
wheel* for a short while. Do not exceed the
maximum speed of 80 km/h and do not deac-
tivate ESP®.
Never drive the vehicle with more than one
emergency spare wheel* fitted.
Securing a vehicle on level ground (example illus-
tration)
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 228

228 Flat tyre
X On downhill gradients: place chocks or Rslip off the jack

similar items under both wheels of the Rinjure you or others
other axle.
Rbe damaged
Thus, it is important to make sure that the jack
is positioned correctly in the respective jack-
ing points. Before positioning the jack,
remove any dirt that may have collected in the
jacking points.
Practical advice
Securing a vehicle on slight downhill slopes (exam-

ple illustration)
Raising the vehicle

G Risk of injury
The jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on
changed.
the wheel you wish to change by about one
You must use axle stands if you are carrying full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
out work on the vehicle. pletely.
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden
blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.
Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve
its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Do not start the engine at any time while a
wheel is being changed.
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise the
vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
(e.g. if the engine is started or if a door or the
tailgate is opened or closed) and you could be
seriously injured.
G Risk of accident
If you fail to position the jack correctly, the
vehicle may:
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 229

Flat tyre 229
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could

cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub.
G Risk of accident
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or Service 24h for this pur-
X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1. pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
Practical advice
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Other
bolts could work loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle
X Make sure that the vehicle jack stands could topple off the jack.
upright and perfectly straight.
X Take ratchet ring spanner 3 from the
vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon
nut of jack 2 so that the letters AUF are
visible.
X Raise the vehicle with ratchet ring spanner
3 until the tyre is at most three centime-
tres off the ground.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. This could cause damage to 1 Wheel bolts for 17", 19" and 20" wheels
the bolt and wheel hub threads.
2 Wheel bolts for the "Minispare" emer-
X Remove the wheel. gency spare wheel*
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
Fitting a new wheel surfaces.
G Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 230

230 Flat tyre
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the fol-

lowing two electric air pumps:
Rversion 1: electric air pump with pressure
gauge fitted to the hose
Rversion 2: electric air pump with an inte-
grated pressure gauge
The following description is valid for both
types. Differences in the way they are used
will be explained explicitly.
X Place the collapsible emergency spare

wheel* onto the wheel hub and push it on.
Practical advice
Version 1
1 Flap
2 On/off switch
3 Electric connector with cable
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
ger-tight. 4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and
pressure release screw
Inflating the "Minispare" emergency 5 Union nut
spare wheel*
G Risk of accident
Pump up the collapsible emergency spare
wheel before lowering the vehicle. Otherwise,
you could damage the wheel rim.
X Take the electric air pump out of the stow-

age well under the luggage compartment
floor (Y page 175).
G Risk of injury
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety Version 2
instructions on the sticker on the electric air 2 On/off switch
pump. 3 Electric connector with cable
4 Pressure gauge
5 Union nut
6 Pressure release button
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 231

Flat tyre 231
X Version 1: open flap 1. Lowering the vehicle

X Version 1: pull connector 3 and air hose X Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the
4 out of the housing. hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
X Version 2: pull connector 3 and the air AB are visible.
hose out of the housing. X Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
X Version 1: make sure that pressure ring spanner until the vehicle is once again
release screw 4 on the pressure gauge is standing firmly on the ground.
fully closed. X Place the jack to one side.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre.
X Screw union nut 5 on the air hose onto the
valve.
X Make sure on/off switch 2 of the electric
Practical advice
air pump is set to 0.
X Insert plug 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket* (Y page 138) or into a 12 V socket
in your vehicle (Y page 139).
X Make sure that the key is in posi-
tion 2 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock.
X Press on/off switch 2 on the electric air X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
pump to I. wise pattern in the sequence indica-
The electric air pump is switched on. The ted (1 to 5). The tightening torque is
tyre is inflated. 150 Nm.
X When a tyre pressure of 2.8 bar is reached,
press on/off switch 2 on the electric air G Risk of accident
pump to 0. Have the tightening torque checked immedi-
The electric air pump is switched off. ately after a wheel is changed. The wheels
could work loose if they are not tightened to
! Do not operate the electric air pump for a torque of 150 Nm.
longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and
The air pump can be operated again once stow it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in
it has cooled down. the luggage compartment.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 2.8 bar: X Transport the faulty wheel in the boot.
X Version 1: open pressure release
i Do not activate the tyre pressure moni-
screw 4 on the pressure gauge until the
tor* until the deflated tyre has been
tyre pressure is correct.
removed from the vehicle.
X Version 2: press pressure release button
6 until the tyre pressure is correct.
X Switch off the electric air pump at on/off
switch 2, disconnect from the tyre valve
and stow away.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 232

232 Battery
Battery Keep children away.

Notes on the vehicle battery
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
Observe this Owner's Man-
mum possible service life, it must always be
ual.
sufficiently charged.
Have the battery charge checked more fre-
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a H Environmental note
lengthy period. Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
To prevent damage from corrosion, only hold rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in
replace the battery with one that has a central an environmentally responsible manner. Take
ventilation cover. them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or
Practical advice
to a special collection point for old batteries.

Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for G Risk of injury
a long period of time.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
G Risk of injury mends that you only use batteries which have
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- been tested and approved for your vehicle by
tective measures when handling batteries. Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
Risk of explosion increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
cle occupants from suffering acid burns
should the battery be damaged in the event
of an accident.
Fire, naked flames and To prevent acid burns, observe the following
smoking are prohibited safety notes when handling batteries:
when handling the battery. Rdo not lean over the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery.
Battery acid is caustic.
Avoid contact with the skin, Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit
eyes or clothing. and the battery's gas mixture could ignite.
Rmake sure that you do not create an elec-
Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic
gloves, an apron and a face clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics.
mask. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the
Immediately rinse acid battery over carpets or other synthetic
splashes off with clean materials.
water. Consult a doctor if Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge
necessary. a possible electrostatic charge, step out of
Wear eye protection. the vehicle first and touch the bodywork.
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
battery may explode as a result of electro-
static charge or due to flying sparks.
! Switch off the engine and remove the key

before disconnecting the terminal clamps
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 233

Battery 233
from the battery. Otherwise, you may ! Always disconnect the battery in
destroy electronic components, such as the order described below. Never swap the
the alternator. terminal clamps. Otherwise, you may dam-
age the vehicle electronics.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
have all work involving the battery, e.g.
X Apply the parking brake and move the
removal, charging and replacement, car-
selector lever to P.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
radio, blower, etc.).
Installation location of the battery X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 61) in
the ignition lock and remove it.
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the
X Open the bonnet.
engine compartment. It is located on the front
Practical advice
bulkhead under the filter box on the right-
hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the
direction of travel.
X Release clamps ; on filter box :.

X Remove filter box :.
X Remove the negative terminal clamp from
: Battery
the battery.
; Positive terminal
X Remove the cover from the positive termi-
= Negative terminal
nal clamp.
? Breather hose
X Remove the positive terminal clamp from
the battery.
X Disconnect the breather hose.
Disconnecting the battery
G Risk of accident
If the battery is disconnected: Removing the battery
Rthe brake boosting effect will not be avail- X Disconnect the battery (Y page 233).
able. Then, greater braking force will be X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in
required and brake pedal travel will be lon-
place.
ger. If necessary, depress the brake pedal
X Remove the battery.
with maximum force.
Ryou will no longer be able to turn the key in
the ignition lock.
Rthe selector lever is locked in position P.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 234

234 Jump-starting
Charging and fitting the battery Reconnecting the battery

G Risk of injury ! Always reconnect the battery in the
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated sequence described below. Never swap the
area. As the battery is being charged, gases terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
can escape and generate minor explosions. age the vehicle electronics.
This may injure you and other persons or X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and
You can obtain information about battery
secure the cover.
chargers which allow the battery to be
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
charged when still installed from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that
Practical advice
Service Centre. a cell cap is fitted on the side of the battery.

X Close the bonnet.
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of acid burns during the charg- i If the battery power supply has been inter-
ing process due to the gases which escape rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you
from the battery. Do not lean over the battery must carry out the following tasks:
Rset the time (Y page 102).
during the charging process.
Rreset the panorama sliding sun-
G Risk of injury roof* (Y page 127)
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the Rreset the function for folding the exterior
skin, eyes or clothing.
mirrors in/out automatically* by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 68).
! Only charge the installed battery with a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
Jump-starting
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while it is still installed. However, the bat-
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
tery must always be disconnected first.
engine can be jump-started from another
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- vehicle or from an external battery using jump
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. leads.
Observe the following points:
X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in Rjump-starting may only be performed when
the operating instructions for your battery the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
charger.
Rdo not start the engine if the battery is fro-
X Refit the charged battery.
zen. Let the battery thaw first.
To do this, follow the steps described in
Rjump-starting may only be performed from
"Removing the battery" (Y page 233) in
reverse order. batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Ronly use jump leads which have a sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 235

Jump-starting 235
i Jump leads and further information about

jump-starting can be obtained from any
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting

attempts.
Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery
charger.
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of acid burns when jump-start-
ing a vehicle due to the gases which escape
from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
while the engine is being jump-started.
Practical advice
G Risk of explosion
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-
starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid
creating sparks. Keep naked flames away
from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
You will find these under "Battery" in the
index.
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not

touch.
X Depress the parking brake firmly.
X Move the selector lever to P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
X Open the bonnet (Y page 146).
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 236

236
Practical advice Towing and tow-starting
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in Towing and tow-starting

the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehi-
Points to remember
cle to positive terminal = of donor battery G Risk of accident
B using the jump lead, beginning with your If you have the vehicle towed, you must use a
own battery. rigid towing bar if:
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and Rthe engine is not running.
run it at idling speed. Rthere is a brake system malfunction.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor bat-
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
tery B to earth point A of your vehicle
or the vehicle's electrical system.
using the jump lead, connecting the jump
lead to donor battery B first. The power steering and the brake force boos-
X Start the engine. ter do not work when the engine is not run-
ning. Then, greater braking force will be
X First, remove the jump lead from earth
required and brake pedal travel will be longer.
point A and negative terminal ?, then
If necessary, depress the brake pedal with full
from positive terminal ; and positive ter- force.
minal =, each time disconnecting from the
Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannot be
battery on your own vehicle first.
turned in the ignition lock. If this is the case,
X Have the battery checked at a qualified
the steering is locked and the vehicle cannot
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz be steered.
Service Centre.
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported

than to have it towed.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 237

Towing and tow-starting 237
When towing, observe the legal requirements - you cannot switch on the ignition.
in all countries concerned. - you cannot move the selector lever to
! When towing, pull away slowly and with- N.
out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, - you have no support when braking.
the vehicles could be damaged.
i Switch off the automatic locking feature
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, before the vehicle is towed. Otherwise, you
as this could damage the vehicle. If in could be locked out when pushing or tow-
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ing the vehicle.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum Deactivate tow-away protection* before
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must the vehicle is towed (Y page 55).
not be exceeded.
Practical advice
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire
Fitting the towing eye
vehicle needs to be lifted up and transpor-
ted. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you
intend to use the vehicle for towing, fit the ball
! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar coupling (Y page 162)and connect the towbar
to the towing eyes. You may otherwise to it.
damage the vehicle.
RTow-starting the vehicle is not permitted. Opening the front cover
RThe vehicle is equipped with 4MATIC and The mountings for the removable towing eyes
must not be towed with the front or rear are located in the bumpers. They are located
axle raised. at the front and rear behind covers on the
RIf the engine does not start, try jump-start- right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in
ing it (Y page 234). the direction of travel.
RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,
have it towed to the nearest qualified spe-
Service Centre.
RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it carried away on a trans-
porter or trailer.
RThe automatic transmission selector lever
must be in the N position when towing the
vehicle away.
RIf you are towing the vehicle, move the X Press cover : back in the direction of the
automatic transmission selector lever to arrow.
N and turn the key to position X Take cover : off the opening.
2 (Y page 61) in the ignition lock.
RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that
the battery is connected and charged. Oth-
erwise:
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 238

238 Fuses
Opening the rear cover Removing the towing eye

X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 175).
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise.
X Unscrew the towing eye.
X Replace the cover and press it until it

engages.
X Return the towing eye and the wheel
wrench to the vehicle tool kit.
X Press cover : back in the direction of the

Practical advice
arrow. Transporting the vehicle

X Take cover : off the opening.
The towing eyes or trailer coupling* can be
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
Securing the towing eye porter if you wish to transport it.
X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or
from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 175). wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the as axle or steering components. Otherwise,
stop. the vehicle could be damaged.
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
towing eye and tighten it. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 61) in
the ignition lock.
X Move the selector lever to N.
Towing the vehicle
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must Fuses
not be exceeded. Notes on changing fuses
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
vehicle needs to be lifted up and transpor-
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
ted.
nents on the circuit and their functions will
! Vehicles with 4MATIC may not be towed fail.
with the front or rear axle raised. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognise by
the colour and value. The fuse ratings are lis-
ted in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-
the ignition lock.
Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise
X Move the selector lever to N.
you.
G Risk of fire
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 239

Fuses 239
correct fuse rating for the systems con- Fuse box in the dashboard*
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload
could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and
rectified at a qualified specialist workshop,
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the

cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
Service Centre.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
Practical advice
have the correct fuse rating for the system
X To open: open the driver’s door.
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- X Pull out cover : slightly at the bottom
tems could be damaged. =.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X Pull cover : outwards and remove it ;.
Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dash- X To close: clip in cover : at the front.
board* X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the X Close the driver's door.
driver's side
Rfuse box in the stowage well under the lug-
gage compartment floor on the right-hand Fuse box in the engine compartment
side of the vehicle X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
turned off.
Fuse allocation chart
G Risk of injury
The fuse allocation chart is located with the Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
vehicle tool kit (Y page 175) in the stowage turned off and the key is pulled out of the igni-
compartment under the luggage compart- tion lock before you open the cover of the fuse
ment floor. box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and
the wiper rods above the cover could be set
in motion. This could lead to you or others
Before changing a fuse being injured by the wiper rods.
X Park the vehicle.
X Switch off all electrical consumers. X To open: open the bonnet (Y page 146).
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 240

240 Fuses
X Remove moisture from the fuse box using

a dry cloth.
Practical advice
X Unclip lines ; from the lid.

X Fold clamps : upwards.
X Lift off the fuse box cover towards the front
of the vehicle.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
positioned correctly in the lid.
X Insert the lid into the bracket at the rear of
the fuse box.
X Press the lid down and secure with
clamps :.
X Clip lines ; onto the lid.
X Close the bonnet (Y page 146).
Fuse box in the luggage compartment
X To open: open the tailgate.

X Fold luggage compartment floor ;
(Y page 136) upwards.
X Remove stowage compartment* :.
X Open fuse box cover = downwards.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 241

241
Notes on the technical data ............. 242

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 242
Vehicle electronics ........................... 243
Vehicle identification plates ............ 244
Service products and capacities ..... 245
Vehicle data, GLK 280 4MATIC ........ 249
Vehicle data, GLK 350 4MATIC ........ 249
Vehicle data, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC . 250
Tyres and wheels .............................. 251
Trailer coupling* ............................... 253
Technical data
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 242

242 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Notes on the technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
i The technical data was determined in Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-
accordance with EU directives. All data version parts and accessories which have
applies to the vehicle's standard equip- been specifically approved for your vehicle for
ment. Therefore, the data may differ for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
vehicles with optional equipment. You can ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
obtain further information from a unable to evaluate other parts. Therefore,
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles, even if they have been independently or
Tailgate opening dimensions officially approved.
In Germany and some other countries, certain
parts are only officially approved for installa-
tion or modification if they comply with legal
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz
Technical data
parts meet this requirement. The use of non-

approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit. This is the case if:
Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type
from that for which the vehicle's general
operating permit was granted
Rother road users could be endangered
: Max. headroom
Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
; Tailgate opening height
affected
: ; The use of non-approved parts could affect
Vehicle 1,943 mm – 2,075 mm - your vehicle's operating safety. Therefore,
1,955 mm 2,087 mm Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts
and accessories that have been approved for
your vehicle.
Fuel consumption in accordance with
RL 80/1268/EEC H Environmental note
The consumption figures have been deter- Daimler also supplies reconditioned assem-
mined according to applicable EU directives blies and parts which are of the same quality
and do not refer to one specific vehicle. Devi- as new parts. For these, the same warranty
ations from these values may occur under applies as for new parts.
normal operating conditions. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved
conversion parts and accessories are availa-
ble from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres.
There, you can also receive advice about tech-
nical modifications and have the parts pro-
fessionally fitted.
Always quote the vehicle identification num-
ber and the engine number when ordering
genuine parts. You will find these numbers on
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 243

Vehicle electronics 243
your vehicle's identification plates, for exam- Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of
ple (Y page 244). two-way radios if such equipment is installed
professionally and a low-reflection exterior
aerial is used.
Vehicle electronics The transmission output of the two-way radio
must not exceed the maximum transmission
Tampering with the engine electron-
outputs listed.
ics
G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident
Two-way radios may interfere with the vehicle
Only have work on the engine electronics and
electronics and thereby jeopardise the opera-
related components carried out at a qualified
tional safety of the vehicle and your own
specialist workshop which has the necessary
safety if:
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
Rthey do not have an exterior aerial.
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work aerial.
Technical data
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- rectly.
cialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle’s
roadworthiness could be affected.
G Risk of injury
Excessive electromagnetic radiation could
! Only have maintenance work on the result in damage to your health. Using an
engine electronics and its associated parts, exterior aerial takes into account current sci-
such as control units, sensors and connec- entific discussions relating to the possible
tor leads, performed at a qualified special- health hazards that may result from electro-
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service magnetic fields.
Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components
For this reason, only have the exterior aerial
may wear more quickly and your vehicle's
fitted at a qualified specialist workshop which
warranty and operating permit may be inva-
has the necessary specialist knowledge and
lidated.
tools to carry out the work required.
Retrofitting electrical and electronic Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
equipment pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
Electrical and electronic equipment can jeop- at a qualified specialist workshop.
ardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If
equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
be type-approved and bear the e mark. The an approved exterior aerial. This ensures
e mark may be obtained from the equipment optimal reception quality for mobile tele-
manufacturer or an authorised testing centre. phones/wireless devices in the vehicle.
! Damage or consequential damage arising This also ensures that interference
from fitting equipment not approved between these devices and the vehicle's
by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the electronics is kept to a minimum. If con-
Mercedes-Benz warranty. nected, the exterior aerial conducts the
electromagnetic fields transmitted by a
If you wish to install two-way radios in the mobile phone to the exterior of the vehicle.
vehicle, you must obtain formal approval.
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 244

244 Vehicle identification plates
Frequency range Maximum trans-

mission output
(watts)
Short wave 100
(<50 MHz)
4 m waveband 20
2 m waveband 50
70 cm waveband 35
Vehicle identification plate (example)
25 cm waveband 10
: Vehicle identification plate
; Vehicle manufacturer
! If electrical or electronic equipment = EU type approval number
which does not comply with the above ? Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Technical data
installation conditions is operated inside

A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
the vehicle, the vehicle's operating permit
weight
may be invalidated (EU Directive
B Maximum permissible towing weight
95/54/EC - Automotive EMC directive).
C Maximum permissible front axle load
D Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification plates E Paint code
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN) and
paint code number Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification plate is located on In addition to being stamped on the vehicle
the side of the door frame on the front- identification plate, the vehicle identification
passenger side. number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle
body. It is located on the floor in front of the
front-passenger seat.
X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification
plate :.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 245

Service products and capacities 245
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- You can obtain further information from any
most position. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
G Risk of injury
You will see vehicle identification number
When handling, storing and disposing of any
(VIN) ;.
service products, please observe the relevant
regulations, as, otherwise, you could endan-
ger yourself and others.
Engine number Keep service products away from children.
The engine number is stamped on the crank- To protect your health, do not allow service
case. More information can be obtained from products to come into contact with your eyes
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if
any service product is swallowed.
Service products and capacities H Environmental note

Dispose of service products in an environ-
Technical data
Service products are: mentally-responsible manner.
Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

Fuel
Rcoolant
Rbrake
G Risk of explosion
fluid
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
Rwindscreen washer fluid and smoking are therefore prohibited when
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only handling fuels.
use those products which have been tested Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heat-
and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for ing* before refuelling.
your vehicle and are listed in the Mercedes-
Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter G Risk of injury
since: Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
Rparts and service products are matched. skin or clothing.
Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with
service products is not covered by the war- your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging
ranty. to your health.
You can recognise service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- Tank capacity
tion on the containers:
Total capacity 66 l
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB
Of which reserve Approximately 8 l
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
fuel
Other designations or recommendations that
relate to a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (such ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
approved by Mercedes-Benz. vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix
diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of
the wrong fuel result in damage to the
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 246

246 Service products and capacities
injection system. Damage resulting from global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related
warranty. to fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
Further information on refuelling and on fuels Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
(Y page 144). Rdriving style
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
Notes on fuel consumption
ronmental influences or road conditions
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
the following situations:
Rat very low temperatures sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
iced regularly.
Rin urban traffic
Ron short trips
Rwhen towing a trailer Engine oil
Rin mountainous terrain Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils
Technical data
may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines.

The consumption figures have been deter-
mined in accordance with EU Directive A list of the engine oils tested and approved
RL 80 / 1268 / EEC. in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
ifications for Service Products can be called
i Only for certain countries: the respective up by visiting http:\\bevo.daimler.com and
current consumption and emission values entering the MB Sheet number. Further infor-
of your vehicle can be found in the COC mation on tested and approved engine oils
papers (EC CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM- can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
ITY). These documents are supplied when Service Centre. Engine oils which have been
the vehicle is delivered. approved by Mercedes-Benz have the MB
Sheet number indicated on the oil container
! Do not use any special additives, as they under the "MB approval" notice. The table
can cause malfunctions and engine dam- shows which MB Sheet number applies to
age. Damage resulting from the use of such which engine:
additives is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz warranty.
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
tists believe to be principally responsible for
GLK 280 4MATIC GLK 320 CDI GLK 320 CDI

GLK 350 4MATIC 4MATIC 4MATIC33
MB Sheet number 229.3/229.5 229.31/229.51 229.3/229.31
229.5/229.51
i In the event that the:
33 Vehicles without diesel particle filter.

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 247

Service products and capacities 247
Rengine oil brand this means it is thick; a low viscosity means

Rgrade (MB Sheet number) that it is thin.
RSAE
Select the SAE classification (viscosity) of the
classification (viscosity)
engine oil according to the outside tempera-
is not available, you can use another min- ture. The following table shows you the vis-
eral or synthetic engine oil which has been cosity classes to be used depending on the
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You must average air temperature.
then have an oil change carried out at the
earliest possible opportunity.
Mixing oils reduces the benefits of high-
grade engine oil.
! Do not use lubricant additives as they can

lead to increased wear and damage to
mechanical assemblies. The use of lubri-
cant additives will result in a restriction of
Technical data
your warranty.
! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel

particle filter may also be used temporarily Capacities
in vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the
engine oil listed is not available. You must The following values refer to an oil change
then have an oil change carried out as soon including the oil filter.
as possible.
Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
Engine with oil fil- GLK 280 GLK 350 GLK 320 CDI
ter
Replacement 7.0 l 7.0 l 8.0 l
amount
Coolant adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-

tion.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the ! Only top up with coolant that has been
following tasks: premixed with the desired antifreeze pro-
Ranti-corrosion protection tection. Otherwise, you could damage the
Rantifreeze protection engine.
Rraising
Further information on coolants and on fill-
the boiling point
ing can be found in the Mercedes-Benz
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is Specifications for Service Products, sheet
topped up with a coolant that will ensure
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 248

248 Service products and capacities
310.1, or at any Mercedes-Benz Service If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
Centre. equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
even in countries where high temperatures which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.
prevail.
! The cooling system contains a supply
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be
which must be renewed after 15 years, or
sufficiently protected from corrosion, and
after 250, 000 km at the latest.
the boiling point will be too low.
The warranty is only valid if you top up with
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which
the correct concentration, the boiling point of has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and
the coolant will be around 130 °C. the recommended mixture ratio is
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- observed.
tion in the cooling system should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling Capacities
Technical data
system against freezing down to around

The following values indicate the total cooling
–37 °C.
system capacities.
Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze
protection down to –45 °C); otherwise,
heat will not be effectively dissipated.
GLK 280 GLK 350 GLK 320 CDI

Coolant 8.4 l 8.4 l 11.5 l
Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection
Down to –37 °C 4.2 l 4.2 l 5.75 l
(approx. 50%)
Down to –45 °C 4.6 l 4.6 l 6.3 l
(approx. 55%)
Brake fluid Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in

the Service Booklet.
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling
point. i There is usually a notice in the Engine,
Compartment to remind you when the next
G Risk of accident brake fluid change is due.
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
vapour pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This would impair braking
efficiency.
Have the brake fluid renewed every two years
with a brake fluid that has been approved by
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 249

Vehicle data, GLK 350 4MATIC 249
Windscreen washer system Vehicle dimensions, GLK 280 4MATIC

The washer fluid reservoir holds approxi- Vehicle height 1683 – 1689 mm
mately 6.0 litres.
The headlamp cleaning system* and wind- Wheelbase 2755 mm
screen washer system are both supplied from
the washer fluid reservoir. Vehicle weights, GLK 280 4MATIC
Further information on windscreen washer
fluid and its mixing ratio (Y page 149). Unladen weight (in 1830 kg
accordance with
EU Directive)34
Vehicle data, GLK 280 4MATIC
Maximum roof 75 kg
Engine, GLK 280 4MATIC load
Rated output 170 kW (231 bhp) You will find weight information specific to
Technical data
the vehicle on the vehicle identification
At engine speed 6000 rpm plate (Y page 244).
Rated torque 300 Nm
Fuel consumption, GLK 280 4MATIC in
At engine speed 2500 – 5000 rpm
accordance with RL 80/1268/EEC
Number of cylin- 6 (Y page 242)
ders
Urban 14.1 l/100 km
Displacement 2996 cm3 Extra-urban 8.3 – 8.4 l/100 km
Maximum engine 6500 rpm Overall (NEDC) 10.4 – 10.5 l/
speed
100 km
CO2emissions 244 – 246 g/km
Performance, GLK 280 4MATIC
Maximum speed 210 km/h
Vehicle data, GLK 350 4MATIC
Acceleration from 7.6 seconds
0 to 100 km/h
Engine, GLK 350 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions, GLK 280 4MATIC Rated output 200 kW (272 bhp)
Vehicle length 4525 mm At engine speed 6000 rpm

(ECE) Rated torque 350 Nm
Vehicle width 2016 mm At engine speed 2400 – 5000 rpm
including exterior
mirrors Number of cylin- 6
ders
34 Theunladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of
optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload.
* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 250

250 Vehicle data, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC
Engine, GLK 350 4MATIC Fuel consumption, GLK 350 4MATIC in

accordance with RL 80/1268/EEC
Displacement 3498 cm3 (Y page 242)
Maximum engine 6300 rpm Overall (NEDC) 10.6 – 10.8 l/
speed 100 km
Performance, GLK 350 4MATIC
Maximum speed 230 km/h
Vehicle data, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC
0 to 100 km/h
Engine, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions, GLK 350 4MATIC Rated output 165 kW (224 bhp)
At engine speed 3800 rpm
Technical data
Vehicle length 4525 mm

(ECE) Rated torque 540 Nm
Vehicle width 2016 mm At engine speed 1600 – 2400 rpm
including exterior
mirrors Number of cylin- 6
ders
Vehicle height 1683 – 1689 mm
Displacement 2987 cm3
Wheelbase 2755 mm
Maximum engine 4200 rpm
speed
Vehicle weights, GLK 350 4MATIC
Unladen weight (in 1830 kg Performance, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC
accordance with
EU Directive)35 Maximum speed 220 km/h
Maximum roof 75 kg 0 to 100 km/h
load
You will find weight information specific to Vehicle dimensions, GLK 320 CDI
the vehicle on the vehicle identification 4MATIC
plate (Y page 244).
Vehicle length 4525 mm
(ECE)
Fuel consumption, GLK 350 4MATIC in
accordance with RL 80/1268/EEC Vehicle width 2016 mm
(Y page 242) including exterior
mirrors
Urban 14.6 l/100 km
Extra-urban 8.4 – 8.5 l/100 km
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 251

Vehicle dimensions, GLK 320 CDI systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are
4MATIC marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Vehicle height 1683 – 1689 mm
If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can-
Wheelbase 2755 mm not accept any responsibility for damage
which may occur. Information about tyres
can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Vehicle weights, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC Service Centre.
Unladen weight (in 1880 kg
accordance with ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and
EU Directive)36 recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac-
teristics such as handling, noise levels and
fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely
Maximum roof 75 kg affected. In addition, when driving with a
load load, tyre dimensional variations could
cause the tyres to come into contact with
Technical data
You will find weight information specific to
the vehicle on the vehicle identification the bodywork and axle components. This
plate (Y page 244). could result in damage to the tyres or the
vehicle.
Fuel consumption, GLK 320 CDI 4MATIC i Further information about tyres and
in accordance with RL 80/1268/EEC wheels can be obtained from any
(Y page 242) Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Urban 10.3 – 10.7 l/ You will find a table of tyre pressures on the
100 km inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. You
will find further information about tyre pres-
Extra-urban 6.5 – 7.0 l/100 km sures in the "Operation" section
(Y page 152).
Overall (NEDC) 7.9 – 8.4 l/100 km
Tyres and wheels

Points to remember
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tyres which
have been approved specifically for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are
specially adapted for use with the control
Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 252

Tyres of the same dimensions
Both axles
GLK 280 / GLK 350 / GLK 320 CDI
17" All-weather tyres37 235/60 R17 102 V M+S
Winter tyres 235/60 R17 102 H M+S i
All-terrain tyres38 235/60 R17 102 H M+S
Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47.5
19" All-weather tyres37 235/50 R19 99 V M+S
Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 19 H2 ET 47
Technical data
Mixed tyres
i FA: front axle; RA: rear axle
GLK 280 / GLK 350 / GLK 320 CDI
17" FA All-weather tyres39 235/60 R17 102 V M+S
Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 47.5
RA All-season tyres39, 40 255/55 R17 104 V M+S
Light-alloy wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 57
19" FA Summer tyres 235/50 R19 99 V
RA Summer tyres40 255/45 R19 100 V
20" FA Summer tyres 235/45 R20 100 W XL
37 All-weather tyres with M+S approval. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for information.
38 All-terrain
tyres for retrofitting. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service
39 All-weather tyres with M+S approval. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service
40 Use of snow chains not permitted.
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 253

Trailer coupling* 253
GLK 280 / GLK 350 / GLK 320 CDI

RA Summer tyres40 255/40 R20 101 W XL
Emergency spare wheel*

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped
with TIREFIT or a collapsible emergency spare wheel*.
Collapsible emergency spare wheel*41
GLK 280 / GLK 350 / GLK 320 CDI
17" Tyres 185/75 - 17 98P
Technical data
Tyre pressure 2.8 bar
Wheels 6.0B x 17 H2 ET 25
Trailer coupling*
Mounting dimensions
G Risk of accident
Only have a trailer coupling retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
Anchorage points for the trailer coupling
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
: Anchorage points
sis frame.
; Overhang dimension
= Rear axle centre line

* optional Z
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 254

254 Trailer coupling*
For trailer couplings fitted at the factory, the

overhang dimension is 1,030.5 mm.
Trailer loads
All models
Permissible trailer load, 750 kg
unbraked
Permissible trailer load, 2,000 kg
braked42
Maximum drawbar nose- 80 kg
weight43
Permissible rear axle load 1,300 kg
Technical data
when towing a trailer
42 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.

43 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
* optional
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 255

255
X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 256

256

Mercedes GLK Suv 2008 x204 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes GLK Suv 2008 x204 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

Internal use only

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 1

Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz.

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 2

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 3

Practical advice................................. 173

Technical data.................................... 241

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 4

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the air distribution.............. 124

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 5

Selector lever positions.................... 85 Brake lamps

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 6

Central locking Cornering lights

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 7

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 8

Engine oil ........................................... 246 Fuel...................................................... 245

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 9

H Intelligent Light System...................... 77

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 10

Dipped-beam headlamps.................. 75 Lumbar support.................................... 65

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 11

MP3 Convenience submenu................... 104

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 12

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 13

Reversing lamps Settings

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 14

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 15

Towing eye Tyres

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 16

Washer fluid reservoir............... 149, 249

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 17

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 18

Operating safety your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 19

Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 20

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 21

Exterior view ....................................... 22

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 22

Function Page Function Page

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 23

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 24

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 25

Indicator and warning lamps

D ABS warning lamp 201

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 26

Vehicles with a luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 buttons*)

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 27

Indicator and warning lamps

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 28

28 Multi-function steering wheel

Multi-function steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 29

Multi-function steering wheel 29

Luxury multi-function steering wheel (12 button)

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 30

Function Page Function Page

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 31

Overhead control panel 31

Overhead control panel

X204_AKB; 1; 5, en-GB 2008-10-15T13:20:56+02:00 - Seite 32